Revit Architecture 2009

Imperial Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM03A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . Adding Project Levels . . Creating a Column Grid . Adding Beams . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77

v

Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 . 159 . 164 . 171 . 177 . 181 . 181 . 184 . 187 . 189 . 192 . 197 . 197 . 201 . 205 . 208

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 . 213 . 219 . 223 . 226 . 226 . 231 . 233 . 236 . 238 . 244 . 252 . 255 . 255 . 257 . 260 . 264 . 264 . 266 . 266

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

vi | Contents

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 269 . 270 . 274 . 274 . 284 . 286 . 291 . 294 . 295

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 . 302 . 309 . 313 . 314 . 317 . 319 . 323 . 324 . 324 . 325 . 327

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 . 343 . 349 . 349 . 351 . 351 . 355 . 361 . 361 . 363 . 365 . 366 . 372 . 373 . 373 . 374

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 . 398 . 405 . 409 . 413 . 417

Contents | vii

Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 418 . 421 . 425 . 430 . 431 . 434 . 436

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 . 438 . 439 . 441 . 443 . 444 . 445 . 446 . 446 . 449 . 450 . 450 . 453 . 453 . 454 . 460 . 460

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 . 465 . 466 . 469 . 472 . 473 . 475 . 477 . 478 . 482 . 484 . 487 . 490 . 497 . 498 . 505 . 509

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

viii | Contents

Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 531 . 542 . 544 . 544 . 547 . 550 . 553 . 554 . 555 . 558

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 . 563 . 568 . 571 . 573 . 576 . 578 . 580 . 581 . 584 . 592 . 592 . 594 . 595

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 . 610 . 616 . 618 . 622 . 622 . 624 . 627 . 630 . 630 . 633 . 634 . 637 . 640 . 644 . 646 . 650 . 655

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 . 659 . 667 . 671

Contents | ix

Working with Detail Groups . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 674 . 674 . 677 . 680 . 680

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 . 684 . 691 . 695 . 697 . 704 . 709 . 712 . 716 . 719

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 . 724 . 724 . 728 . 732 . 735 . 740

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 . 746 . 756 . 763

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778 . 778 . 787 . 790 . 792 . 795 . 795 . 797 . 801 . 802 . 803

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809

x | Contents

Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 809 . 811 . 813 . 814 . 817 . 817 . 821 . 823 . 826 . 831 . 833 . 834 . 837 . 837 . 838 . 843 . 845 . 848 . 849 . 851

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

quantities. drawing sheets. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. and residential. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. and plans. and schedules required for a building project. review the Revit Architecture templates. In this case. the operation of the software is parametric. and open Imperial\Templates. the door retains this relationship to the partition. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the floor or roof remains connected.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. 12 Select default. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the hierarchy of elements. As you work in drawing and schedule views. scope. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. For most tutorial projects. sections. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. In the Revit Architecture model. drawings. You learn the terminology. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. click Training Files. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. you will use the default template. In this case. 13 Click OK. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. every drawing sheet. construction. how to navigate the user interface. If the length of the elevation is changed. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. 2D and 3D view. If you move the partition. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition.rte. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. and phases when you need it. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. and click Open. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. and customize the project as necessary. hence. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. schedules. the parameter is one of association or connection. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views.

For example. For example. programming is not required. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. and cabinets are model components. grids. They display in relevant views of the model. For example. filled regions. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. windows. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. tags. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Examples include detail lines. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. They help to describe or document the model. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. and roofs are model elements. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. doors. levels. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Datum elements help to define project context. dimensions. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example.When you change something. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. For example. windows. and keynotes are annotation elements. dimensions. Understanding the Basics | 7 . walls and roofs are hosts. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. doors. tags. If you can draw. walls. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and 2D detail components. and reference planes are datum elements. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers.

In other cases. and types. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. floors. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. you must be in a section or elevation view. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. views of the project. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. for example.In Revit Architecture. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. from geometry to construction data. elevation views. This information includes components used to design the model. first floor. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. top of wall. you can explicitly control them. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. and so forth). Project: In Revit Architecture. or bottom of foundation. Most often. such as roofs. The project file contains all information for the building design. To place levels. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. for example. section views. families. By using a single project file. you do nothing to establish these relationships. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. and drawings of the design. However. Often. schedules. and ceilings.

Navigating the User Interface | 9 . Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. dimensions. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. A type can be a specific size of a family. In the steps that follow. roofs. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. For example.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. ceilings. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. categories of model elements include walls and beams. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. and levels. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. For example. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. such as a 30” X 42” title block or a 32" x 84" door. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. floors. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). making it easy to understand what each button represents. System families include walls. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. In the following illustration. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. and similar graphical representation. specifically its clear user interface. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. However. A type can also be a style. System families can be transferred between projects. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. the user interface is labeled. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. For example. identical use. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy.

new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. In addition. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. This creates a new project based on the default template. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. By default. click (New).

For example. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. Edit. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. which are listed on the menu. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. you type the required key combination to perform the command. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . Click View menu ➤ Zoom. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. and View. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. While working in the drawing area. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The toolbar buttons represent common commands.

when you add a door. a door type is specified. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. 9 In the Type Selector. When you select the Door tool. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. On the left side of the Options Bar. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. For example. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . The Show Design Bars dialog displays. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. In the drawing area. containing buttons grouped by function.

Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. click the tab in the Design Bar. In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. select Views (all). The respective commands display on the Design Bar. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.11 Click OK.

Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. double-click its name. schedules. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 3D). family category (doors. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. The browser is dockable. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. To open a view. windows). and groups. and group name. elevations. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. reports. families.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. delete. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. walls. sheets. families. and rename views. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector.

The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In this case. After creating a browser organization scheme.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. The cursor displays as a pencil. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. click Wall. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. In the bottom left corner of the window. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Do not click. click Cancel. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog.

18 On the Design Bar. regarding selected elements in a view. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. You can use this tri-pane. You can also press SHIFT+F1. 20 Press TAB. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. There are several tools that help you find information. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. Windows: From any window. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. Tooltips: To see tooltips. click on the Standard toolbar. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. It highlights when the cursor is over it. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 3. In addition. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. If no Help button displays. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). Click the Help button. press F1 for context-sensitive help. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. find a keyword on the Index tab. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. in conjunction with tooltips. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. When you place the cursor over an element. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. In the status bar. Toolbar: From the toolbar. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. press F1 for help. click Modify to end the Wall command. The status bar also provides information. After you are familiar with these tasks. and then click a specific menu command or button for help.

For example. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 5 On the View toolbar. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). In the following steps. the view zooms out from the building model.rvt. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. click Training Files.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. In the drawing area. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. There are several ways to access zoom options.

To modify or add snap increments. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 7 Click in the drawing area. If you do not have a wheel mouse. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. the view zooms in on the selected area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. As you move the mouse. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . 10 To display SteeringWheels. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. . NOTE As you zoom in and out. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. this is referred to as a crossing selection. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. When you release the mouse button. on the View toolbar. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.

press ESC. and select the wall. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. Similar controls. To define settings for SteeringWheels. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. expand Views (all). and click the SteeringWheels tab. and then using the Zoom tool again. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. 17 Type ZR. as shown. 18 Click and drag the left control. These are the drag controls. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and double-click 2nd Flr. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. display along the ends. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. 15 To exit the wheel.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. Cnst. When drawing or modifying a building model. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. click Settings menu ➤ Options. to lengthen the wall. called drag controls. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. and click Help. moving the wheel to the desired location. Small blue dots. referred to as shape handles. expand Floor Plans. For more information about SteeringWheels. bottoms.

you want to move the table closer to the wall. Some commands. and click again to specify the ending position. as shown. require 2 clicks to complete the command. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. and on the Tools toolbar. The table moves down. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . for example. In this case. click to specify the starting position. 23 Click next to the lower wall.19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. After selecting the element to move. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. click (Move). Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. such as Move and Copy. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table.

or press CTRL+Z. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. and drag it on top of the table. All changes you make to a project are tracked. click the Undo command. In this example. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. Some commands. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. click Lines. on the Standard toolbar. select the second item in the list. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Move. 26 On the Undo menu. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. such as the Lines command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. 24 Select the plant. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. and click again to end it. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line.

29 To end the command. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. Press ESC twice. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . click Modify. On the Design Bar. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. and annotate building assemblies. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. illustrating how building components work together. In Revit Architecture. When you have finished these tutorials. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. but for training purposes. detail. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. 27 . this tutorial uses imperial units only. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. Use detail components to define an assembly. or referenced as a drafting view. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. In this tutorial.

3 In the Scale list. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . import a DWG detail.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you will create a drafting view. and reference a drafting view. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. create a reference callout. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. click Drafting View. click Training Files. enter Window Head Detail. for Name.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. If necessary. scroll until the folder is displayed. and click OK.

). 9 Type ZR.In the Project Browser. The model zooms out. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. and click Open. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. click Training Files.dwg. 6 In the Colors field list. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. The drawing area is still blank. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. as shown. select Black and White. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. 10 In the drawing area. located directly to the left of the drawing area. displaying the extents of the detail. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command.

in the Type Selector. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .The view displays to the specified area. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. 12 On the Options Bar. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click Reference other view. select Detail View: Detail. click Callout. and in the Scale list. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. to activate the view selection list.

select Detail View: Detail. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. double-click the reference callout tag head. select Callout. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area.rvt. adjust the detail view display settings. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and in the Scale list. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . 3 In the drawing area. c_express_workshop_details_start.The reference callout is created. in the Type Selector. 2 On the Options Bar. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”.

enter Wall Base 1. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. for Name.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. 6 In the drawing area. double-click Wall Base 1. under Detail Views(Detail). 5 In the Rename View dialog. under Detail Views (Detail). 4 Right-click Detail 0. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Modify to clear the selection. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown.

The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. bordered by a solid line. This is the view crop region.

13 On the View Control Bar. 14 In the drawing area. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. click (Hide Crop Region). under Graphics. right-click. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. and click OK. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select As Underlay.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. and click View Properties. for Display Model. 16 Click OK.

and press ENTER.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. typical details can easily be placed.Brick on Mtl. Stud. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. type 1' 6''. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. 17 On the View Control Bar. 20 In the drawing area. Directly above the drawing area. If the crop region is enlarged. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. click Detail Components. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. 19 In the Type Selector. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. on the Options Bar. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. By grouping detail components.

expand Groups ➤ Detail. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. and click Create Instance. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . as shown. click Modify to end the command. add the following detail components as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. 25 In the Project Browser. 23 Using the same method.

28 Press ESC to end the command. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.4" Slab detail. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .

Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 323. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. Leader. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. click Browse. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004.rvt. map keynotes by material. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and Free End are selected. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Keynote ➤ Element. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. for Full Path. click Training Files. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. You can customize this list. For more information about customizing a keynote database. In the next exercise. c_express_workshop_details_start.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. special notes. and under Keynote Table. in the type selector. and format keynote styles. and verify that Horizontal. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. consistent means of identifying building assembly components.txt. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. or instructions within a construction documentation package. 4 On the Options Bar.

use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. 8 Click to place the tag. 9 Press ESC to end the command. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . 7 Click to place the leader arm. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. If no value has been specified. Keynoting | 39 . 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. a question mark displays. Either move the text inside.5 In the drawing area.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties.

15 Select 07 21 00. 12 Click to place the leader arm. click Keynote ➤ Material. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. 13 Click to place the tag. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. and click OK. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 16 In the drawing area.

You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. Click OK. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . 17 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Selector.All items within the selection display in red. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number .Boxed. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Only the keynotes remain selected. Select Keynote Tags. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. Click Check None. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. legends.

In this exercise. but for training purposes. Add labels to a title block.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Update drawing sheet and project information. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. In this lesson. update the project information element properties. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. Place views on drawing sheets. and modify and update the project sheet title block. you will create a sheet. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

3 Click OK. In the Project Browser. If necessary. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing.rvt. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). or in the element properties of the title block. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. scroll until the folder is displayed. In Revit Architecture.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. click Training Files. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Project Sheet Layout | 43 .

as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. Then. and click Rename. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Enter K. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Click OK. For Name. enter A602. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. In this tutorial. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 9 In the Project Browser. right-click A602 . hold down the wheel and drag. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in.4 Type ZR. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel.Unnamed. roll the wheel. click Modify to clear the selection. enter Sections/Details. To zoom in and out. 5 In the drawing area. To pan. double-click Checker. 6 In the Title Block. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. Smith and press ENTER. under Sheets(all). you can enter ZE to zoom out.

15 In the Options Bar. 13 Click OK. enter Design Development. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. enter 4/10/2008. For Project Name. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. For Project Status.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Client Name. 16 Type ZR. select the title block. select Text : 1/8''. 17 On the Design Bar. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. 20 Click and type Project Status. enter J. The Family Editor opens. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . (Left) is selected. click Text. Smith. 18 On the Options Bar. in the Type Selector.

as shown. 22 Using the same method. as shown. in the Type Selector. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. under Category Parameters. to add 28 Using the same method. and click OK. and click. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. click Label. click Modify to exit the command. and verify that (Top) are selected. 23 On the Design Bar. click (Load into Project). 29 On the Design Bar. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . add Project Issue Date parameter. select Label : 3/16''. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar.21 On the Design Bar.

4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog.30 In the Reload Family dialog. to a drawing sheet. for Name. and click Yes. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. click Training Files. place and modify a keynote legend. Next you will create. In this exercise. you will create. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. for Full Path. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. representing the view or schedule. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. a viewport displays. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project.Project. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. and under Keynote Table.txt. enter Keynote Legend . click Browse. select Override parameter values of existing types.

on the Appearance tab. 8 In the Project Browser. clear Show Headers. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. under Sheets (all). TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. double-click A601 . The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. and drag Keynote Legend . as shown.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. expand Legends. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. under Text.Sections/Details. and click OK.

The keynote legend is visible.9 Press ESC to clear the selection.Project as shown. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet.

the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. at the bottom of the Filter tab. for View Name. and click OK.Project. right-click Keynote Legend . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Keynote Legend .Sheet. not keynotes. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The Keynote Legend is now blank. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. as shown. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. under Legends. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. 19 Click OK twice. click Edit. expand Detail Views (Detail). and click Properties. 15 In the Project Browser. for Filter.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. select Filter by sheet.

expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.The keynote legend is automatically updated. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. and then add and update a Drawing list. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. 2 In the Project Browser. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. The view remains selected. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . as shown. The view title with line displays below the viewport. under Sheets (all).Title Sheet 1. double-click A0 .

5 In the Project Browser. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. The drawing list remains selected. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . You can specify text attributes for view titles. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. and zoom in on the drawing list. by default. Revit Architecture displays a view title. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. 3 In the Type Selector. expand Schedules/Quantities. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. Press ESC to clear the selection. 6 Type ZR. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection.When you place a view on a sheet. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. define the information to include in a view title. as shown. or omit view titles from sheets. As part of a construction document set.

under Sheets (all). under Identity Data. clear Appears In Drawing List.Sections/Details and select A801 . and click OK. select A602 .Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. including only sheets that contain views. while pressing SHIFT. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. 8 In the Project Browser. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. right-click the selected sheets.Ceiling Plans. The drawing list display is updated. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

As you develop the building design. it is good practice to test the constraints.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. If the grid moves. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. 57 . a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. a curtain wall. the wall or column will move with it. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. For example. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. a central service core.

5 Click OK. West. The new project opens. In practice. you load any required family type that is not in your project. and click Browse. and settings. views. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. select Project. such as a door or window. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. verify that the second option is selected. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. under Projects.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. 3 Under Template file. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. from the product library. click Training Files. In the drawing area in the right pane. and open Imperial\Templates\default. with an RVT extension. levels. In views that display elevation markers. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. After the beginning exercises. you will use the default template. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. The project is stored as a single file. click New. you use a template that is provided with the software. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. Creating the Project In this exercise. South. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. under Create new. To create the project file. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. construction. you design inside the elevation markers.rte. and residential. East. 2 In the New Project dialog. You can access these 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and customize the project as necessary. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. For this project. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. but contains no geometry. notice four elevation markers.

as well as change their names. Sheets (all). The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. and families in your project. 14 For File name. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. the view you see in the drawing area. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. delete. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. double-click South. and click Training Files. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. 7 If necessary. heights. 13 In the file window. such as schedules and legends. change their properties. will be accessible from the Project Browser. and other properties. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. and duplicate levels. reflected ceiling plan views. notice the Legends. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. and elevation views created in the project by the template. then expand Floor Plans. 8 Under Floor Plans. schedules. double-click Imperial. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). Families. and Elevations (Building Elevation). Two level lines. content and building model reports. Creating the Project | 59 . Ceiling Plans. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. created by the template. You can add. display in the south elevation. sheets. NOTE If you create a project without a template.views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. expand Views (all). The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. 10 In the Project Browser. These views are customizable: you can rename them. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. Schedules/Quantities. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. As you design and document your building model. Groups. duplicate them. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. enter Revit Retail Building. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. locate the Project Browser. and delete them.

doors. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. to each other. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. Adding Project Levels on page 60. and double-click South.rvt) is selected. you will want to save your work frequently. Adding Project Levels In this exercise.15 For Save as type. You learn how the levels are locked. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. view the Save reminder interval. and press ENTER. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. You change the names of the 2 default levels. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 17 Proceed to the next exercise. so that when one level moves. 16 Click Save. verify that Project Files (*. expand Views (all). Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and on the General tab. the other levels move and change with it. enter 00 Foundation. After you modify the two default levels. or constrained. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. and windows within the building model. When you begin designing. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work.

and press ESC. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. If it does not. click Level. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. 12'-6'' above 01 Entry Level. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 13 On the Options Bar. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. enter 0'. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. Adding Project Levels | 61 . 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. and press ENTER. enter 01 Entry Level. Next. 5 In the Project Browser. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. not all the tabs are visible. When you add the new level. As you move the cursor. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. and click Basics. and then move it up. and click OK. 14 Click Plan View Types. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. and press ENTER. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. view the Design Bar. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. right-click. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. enter -6'. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. By default.TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. and press ENTER. 16 Enter 12'-6''. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. This is the Options Bar. which should display by default. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height.

27 Rename the level 03 Level. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. enter 12'-6''. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. right-click Level 3. add 3 levels 12’-6” apart above 03 Level. 23 On the Options Bar. click Modify to end the command. 19 Click OK.18 In the Project Browser. click (Pick Lines). Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. and enter 02 Level. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. under Floor Plans. 21 In the Project Browser. or on the Design Bar. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. and rename the corresponding views. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . using a different option. click Level. Next. 12'-6'' above the 02 Level line. If you create a level by copying it. and for Offset. 26 Press ESC. click Rename. you add another level. 25 Click to place the level line. and move it slightly upward.

Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Adding Project Levels | 63 . The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. as shown. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. Notice that by moving the top level. If you select a level and click its lock. all the levels move. the levels are no longer constrained. and you can move them independently. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.

4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. double-click 00 Foundation. click Modify. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. When the grid is complete. so that if the roof elevation changes. under Floor Plans. and specify the grid line endpoint. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. Move the cursor up.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. In the following exercise. click Grid. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In a later exercise. On the Design Bar. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. 3 On the Options Bar. select (Draw). 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you constrain the column heights to the roof level. the column height changes as well. specify a start point for the grid line.

and click to place the line. On the Options Bar. and click to place the line. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. and press ENTER. Enter A. On the Options Bar. for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. Click to place the grid line. for Offset. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. enter 25'. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to place the line. click Grid. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. click (Pick Lines). enter 15'. Next. and for Offset. enter 25'. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C.

8 Press ESC. Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. click Grid. as shown. and specify the grid line endpoint. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. click Dimension. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0'. 11 On the Design Bar. click (Aligned). click Grid. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 25' and 15'. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. 14 On the Options Bar. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. On the Options Bar.

20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 22 While pressing CTRL. ■ Creating a Column Grid | 67 . and press ESC. 24 Press ESC. select grid lines C and 3. Two pins display on the grid lines. click and drag the blue circular grip up. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. click Modify. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. until it is closer to grid line A. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. At the left endpoint of the grid line. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. click Dimension. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. By pinning these central grid lines. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. and select grid line A. The pins are hidden. If necessary. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. 23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. and press ESC.15 Starting with grid line A. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 21 Press ESC twice. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. until it is closer to grid line 5.

building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. 35 In the Type Selector. enter 1/4'' Bubble with Gap. and on the Options Bar. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 On the Design Bar. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. 26 In the drawing area. enter 2''. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. click Modify. 33 On the Design Bar. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display.Create a custom grid family type In some cases. click . 29 In the Name dialog. (Element Properties). click Edit/New. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click the value for Center Segment. and select None. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. 34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. select Grid : 1/4'' Bubble with Gap. select grid line 5. click Duplicate. click Modify. 32 Click OK twice. 31 For End Segments Length.

click (Grid Intersection). select Grid : 1/4'' Bubble. For Place By. and press ESC. 43 Press ESC. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. and in the Type Selector. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select W-Wide Flange-Column: W10x49. and on the Options Bar. click Activate Dimensions. click Structural Column. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. and unlock it. 39 In the Type Selector. select grid line A. select all of the grid lines. 46 On the Options Bar. 45 While pressing CTRL. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 47 Enter 18'. and press ENTER. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL.37 Select the grid lines again. click Finish. The original continuous grid lines are restored.

51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .48 On the Standard toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. lock it. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. select 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. and click to place the target point of the camera. If it is unlocked. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. Next. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. ■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. 52 On the Options Bar. click Camera. for From. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns.

The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. Creating a Column Grid | 71 .

The current view.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. named 3D View 1 by default. Adding Beams In this exercise. Right-click 3D View 1. displays in bold under 3D Views. under Views (all). You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. and click Rename. enter To Building. Adding Beams on page 72. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. and click OK. and then copy them to subsequent levels. expand 3D Views. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . In the Rename View dialog.

4 Click Medium. select each grid line. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level.When you finish adding beams. verify that W-Wide Flange: W12x26 is selected. 8 While pressing CTRL. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Beam. view the icons on the View Control Bar. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. 7 On the Options Bar. click (Create Beam On Grid). The view is currently set to Coarse. 6 In the Type Selector. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. the icon on the right side of the scale. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. Adding Beams | 73 .

double-click 01 Entry Level. 9 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View). 10 In the Project Browser. and click Select All Instances. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click Modify.The selected grid lines display as red. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. 14 Select one of the beams. Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. 12 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Design Bar. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under Floor Plans. under 3D Views. right-click. click Finish.

20 Click Cancel. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. and click Select All Instances. press and hold SHIFT. select 02 Level. and click OK. 21 With the column selected. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. click 24 Press ESC. 22 On the Options Bar. and click OK. When you created the columns. view the Top Level parameter. All of the columns display as red. under Constraints. (Element Properties). for Top Level. select 06 Roof. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. right-click. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. select 06 Roof.17 In the Select Levels dialog. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. under Instance Parameters. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. right-click. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. Adding Beams | 75 . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. which only extend to the 5th level. 06 Roof.

double-click To Building.25 In the Project Browser. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. resize the view to see the entire structure. Because the Model Graphics Style is Hidden Line and the Detail Level is Coarse. and if necessary. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. the structural elements display only as lines. under 3D Views. under Elevations. double-click South.

Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. To better add the braces to the structure. Adding Braces In this exercise. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.27 Save the drawing. double-click 00 Foundation. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Braces | 77 . Adding Braces on page 77. click Framing Elevation. you create 8 framing elevation views. 3 On the Options Bar. verify that Attach to Grid is selected.

double-click the elevation marker arrow. and press ESC to end the command. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid.4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. The associated framing elevation view displays. Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid.

verify that W-Wide Flange: W12x26 is selected. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. but when placed the braces are placed. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. and when the endpoint snap displays. Adding Braces | 79 . 8 In the Type Selector.6 Select the crop region (if necessary). and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. 7 On the Design Bar. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. click to specify the start point of the brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. click Brace. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays.

delete it and redraw it. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. and press ENTER. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . press ESC twice. After you add the final brace. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. The height of the roof lowers. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height.11 Using the same technique. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. enter 59'. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements.

16 On the bottom right side of the grid. Adding Braces | 81 . click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. and press ENTER. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. double-click 00 Foundation. enter 33'. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. under Floor Plans. 14 On the Standard toolbar. but this time add them from right to left.

as shown in the 3D view below. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click South. enter 35'. 23 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. 21 Select grid line A. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. double-click 00 Foundation. and press ENTER. click Activate Dimensions. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. under 3D Views. 26 In the Project Browser. NOTE As you add braces.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 80'. under Elevations. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and on the Options Bar. 24 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click the lock that displays to unlock it.

Before you can add the pile caps. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. Creating a Foundation | 83 . Creating a Foundation on page 83. under Floor Plans. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay.Test connectivity of the columns. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. lock it. under Floor Plans. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 Save the drawing. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. click and roof height. After you load the pile cap family. double-click 00 Foundation. 29 In the Project Browser. grid size. 28 On the Standard toolbar. beams. and how to load specific families into a project. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. and if necessary. and drag it away from the structure. double-click 00 Foundation.

click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. In the Element Properties dialog. and press ESC twice. press ESC twice. 9 Close the warning dialog. expand Families. click Edit. The foundation pile cap now displays. click Training Files. and click Create Similar. The Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. for Level. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. select Unlimited. under View Depth.2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The pile cap has been added in the view. Click OK twice. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. and expand Structural Foundations. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. and drag it to the drawing area. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. In the View Range dialog. and open Imperial\Families\Structural\Foundations\Pile Cap-Rectangular. under Extents.rfa. 7 Select 81'' x 81'' x 36''. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for View Range. 6 Expand Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). A warning displays. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click View Properties. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. When the final pile cap is placed.

You load new column. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. beam. beams. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. click Training Files. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and brace families into the project. you change the types of the columns.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RRB_update_structure. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. and braces that you used to create the building structure. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure.13 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

under 3D Views. click Brace. 7 On the Design Bar. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click {3D}. and click Select All Instances. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Select All Instances. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available.0500. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. select HSS-Round Hollow Structural Section-Column:HSS20X. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. right-click.625. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section:HSS8X4X. click Modify. select Round Bar: 1''. All columns in the building model display as red. 3 In the Type Selector. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. 9 In the Type Selector. The building model displays the round hollow columns. right-click. 2 Select one of the columns. 6 In the Type Selector.Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser.

and click OK twice. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to Round Bar: 3''.This not the size that you want to use. click Training Files. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). enter 3''. and changing its size parameter. 19 On the Design Bar.rvt. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RRB_architectural. 17 While pressing CTRL. The brace type changes. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the Round Bar: 1'' bar type. for d. enter 3''. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. double-click Elevation 1-a. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. select the braces in the elevation one by one. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Default 3D View). the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. for Type. select Round Bar: 3''. under Dimensions. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. but it is the only size of its type currently available. 18 In the Type Selector. click Modify. and click OK. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 13 In the Name dialog. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 10 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After the files are linked.

click Copy. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. 5 On the Tools toolbar. however.rvt. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. structural members. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. 3 Under Positioning. under Elevations. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. and click Select Link.Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. select the linked Revit model. After the link is established. select Auto . The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. In this case. and click Open. depending on the project. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click South. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. select i_RRB_structure_complete. click (Copy/Monitor). Grids. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. and walls could also be copy/monitored. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change.Origin to Origin. 4 In the Project Browser. 6 In the drawing area.

10 On the Options Bar. and click Delete. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. select Levels 00 through 06. under Floor Plans. while pressing SHIFT. 16 Click OK. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . 13 On the Design Bar. for Floor Plan views. 9 In the drawing area.8 On the Options Bar. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 15 In the New Plan dialog. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). delete the Level 2 floor plan. click Finish. while pressing CTRL. select Multiple. 18 Using the same method. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. right-click Level 1. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. click Finish mode. click OK.

enter Floor Plans. 20 In the drawing area. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select the Topography : Surface. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. 24 In the New View Template dialog. 21 In the drawing area. right-click. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. for Name. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. First.Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. double-click 00 Foundation. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. right-click. and click OK. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. under Floor Plans. 19 In the Project Browser.

select Floor Plans. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. double-click 01 Entry Level. 34 In the 3D view that displays. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. under Floor Plans. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. under Names. 26 In the Project Browser. click Camera. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.25 In the View Templates dialog. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. click OK. and click OK.

Adding Floors on page 92. 36 In the Rename View dialog. Adding Floors In this exercise. and click Rename. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. right-click 3D View 1. enter To Building. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. expand 3D Views.35 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK.

3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. past the first vertical grid line. Some other Revit Architecture elements. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. click (Rectangle). You are now in the Sketch Editor. and elements in the current view display as gray. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. Leave this dimension unlocked. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. such as roofs. and then the first horizontal grid line. ■ Adding Floors | 93 . If the grid changes size. select the top floor line.To create floors. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise. under Floor Plans. and railings are also created from sketches. click Training Files. click Floor. double-click 01 Entry Level. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_floors. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. On the Sketch tab. At the top left corner of the grid. stairs. click Lines. Move the cursor to the left. On the Options Bar.

and change their values to 1'. press ENTER. click Modify. Do not lock the dimensions. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Do not lock the dimension. Select and lock the dimensions. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 1'. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the left dimension. Enter 1'. 5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid.4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. and click the temporary dimension value. select the top floor line. and then press ESC. At the top left corner of the grid.

This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. 8 Select the floor.7 On the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). under Floor Plans. and press ESC. and on the Options Bar. click Lines. enter 5'. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. ■ Adding Floors | 95 . Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. They display on the floor sketch. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Next. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. double-click 02 Level. using a different sketching technique. Select the three remaining floor lines. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. click Edit. and for Offset. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. on the Design Bar. click Quit Sketch. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. click Floor. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. On the Options Bar. On the Sketch tab.

12 At the top left corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown, and lock the dimensions.

13 At the bottom right corner of the grid, dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. The 02 Level floor displays. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 03 Level. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 16 On the Design Bar, click Floor. 17 On the Sketch tab, click Lines. 18 On the Options Bar, click (Rectangle).

19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor.

96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

20 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Align).

The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line, and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line, and a lock icon displays. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. Click the locks to constrain the floors.

24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level, and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. Alternatively, you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level, and lock the edges. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 30 In the Select Levels dialog, select 05 Roof Garden, and click OK.

Adding Floors | 97

31 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 05 Roof Garden. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. 32 Select the floor, and on the Options Bar, click Edit. 33 At the top left corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid, dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. 35 On the Sketch tab, click Finish Sketch. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser, under Views ➤ 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 37 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Roof on page 98.

Adding a Roof
In this exercise, you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building.

98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

To create the roof, you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_roof.rvt.

Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 06 Roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 4 On the Options Bar:

Clear Defines slope. Click (Pick Lines).

■ ■

For Offset, enter 6', and press ENTER.

5 Move the cursor over grid line E, and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. When a blue dashed line displays, click to place the roof line.

Adding a Roof | 99

6 Select grid line 5, move the cursor slightly below the grid line, and when the blue dashed line displays, click to place the roof line.

7 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 1'. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above).

100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

10 Press ESC. 11 Trim the rooflines:
■ ■

On the Tools toolbar, click

(Trim/Extend).

Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep), and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown.

12 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.

Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area, select the roof.

Adding a Roof | 101

14 On the Options Bar, click

(Add new points to the slab shape).

15 On the Options Bar, for Elevation, enter -4'', and press ENTER. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4.

17 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point.

Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof, on grid D, move the cursor down below the roof, and click to specify the section.

102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

20 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section.

23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 24 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 06 Roof. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. In section, you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view, select the roof, and on the Options Bar, click 27 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 28 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Structure [1], select Variable. (Element Properties).

Adding a Roof | 103

The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. 30 Click OK 3 times. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan, select the section line, and press DELETE. 33 In the warning dialog, click OK. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. Add swept fascias

36 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

37 If necessary, on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 38 In the 3D view, zoom in to the roof. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. In this case, the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. 40 In the Type Selector, select Fascia - Roof Edge. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. 41 Starting with the left front edge, moving counter-clockwise, select each edge.

104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

42 On the Design Bar, click Modify. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 44 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Curtain Wall on page 105.

Adding a Curtain Wall
In this exercise, you add a curtain wall. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid, so if you resize the grid, the curtain wall resizes with it.

Adding a Curtain Wall | 105

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_curtainwall.rvt.

Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, click 01 Entry Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 3 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Storefront, and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. When you duplicate a type, you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. The type is saved in the project. 6 In the Name dialog, enter Retail Storefront, and click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

(Element Properties).

Under Construction, for Join Condition, select Horizontal Grid Continuous. Under Vertical Grid Pattern, for Spacing, enter 7'. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern, for Spacing, enter 3’ 6''. Click OK twice.

8 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Level, select 01 Entry Level. For Height, select 05 Roof Garden. For Offset, enter 2'.

106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint, and move it slightly toward the building interior. 10 When a blue dashed line displays, click to place the first curtain wall segment. 11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 2' from the grid lines toward the building interior.

Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar, click (Trim/Extend), and trim each curtain wall segment.

13 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid, and lock the dimensions. If the grid moves, the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. These dimensions are not in a sketch, so they remain in the view. If you want to hide them, you can delete the dimensions, but opt to keep the constraints when prompted.

View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building.

Adding a Curtain Wall | 107

15 On the View Control Bar, verify the view settings:
■ ■

Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 16 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Entrance on page 108.

Creating an Entrance
In this exercise, you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass.

108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_modify_curtainwall.rvt.

Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. To better work with the curtain wall panels, you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display.

2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 On the Model Categories tab, under the element list, click All. All the elements in the list are selected. 4 Under Visibility, clear one element to clear all the elements, and click None. 5 Under Visibility, select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. Do not select Columns, as these usually represent internal pilasters. 6 Click OK.

Creating an Entrance | 109

7 Zoom in to the entrance area, in the center of the 01 Entry Level.

8 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 9 Select 1 panel, press and hold CTRL, and select the other panels around the entrance as shown.

10 When all 9 panels are selected, click the pin to remove it from each of the panels.

110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

11 With the panels selected, in the Type Selector, select System Panel : Solid. 12 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 13 In the Apply View Template dialog, select Architectural Elevation, and click OK. 14 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. 15 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level ➤ Medium. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for, in this case an architectural elevation. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics, you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. 16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

18 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building.

Creating an Entrance | 111

19 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), double-click South. 20 Zoom to the front of the building. 21 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown.

22 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line, and click to select it.

23 On the Options Bar, click Add or Remove Segments. 24 Select the mullion that you selected previously, select another mullion to the right, and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown.

112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

27 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. 30 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). 32 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 31 In the Type Selector. select Curtain Wall Sgl Glass.25 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. click Modify. Creating an Entrance | 113 . 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 29 On the Design Bar. select One Segment. 26 On the Options Bar. and unpin it.

39 Optionally. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. 35 Zoom in to the first panel. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 114. 3rd. click (Default 3D View). select it. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. open the North elevation. and 4th panels. remove the mullions from the 2nd. 36 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. and view the new entrance. 37 Press DELETE. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. and unpin it. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. 34 Zoom in to the front of the building. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and add an entrance to the north side of the building. press TAB until it is selected. 38 Using the same process.33 On the View toolbar.

double-click 01 Entry Level. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. under Graphics. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . 3 Right-click in the view. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. select 02 Level. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building.rvt. 5 Click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click View Properties. for Underlay.

Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. 8 Select the callout. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to complete the callout. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. which indicates you must draw the callout. The cursor changes to a pencil. select the grip closest to the callout head. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column.

15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . as shown. and click OK. 12 Draw a section line. enter Display Area. right-click. 13 Select the section line.9 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click Flip Section. and click Rename. Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. 14 Press ESC. click Section.

Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). and click Rename. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. Click (Rectangle). right-click Section 1. double-click 01 Entry Level. enter Section Display Area. click Wall. expand Sections (Building Section).5 1/2'' Partition (1 hr). select Finish Face: Exterior.16 Select the section box. select Basic Wall: Interior . 18 In the Rename View dialog. For Loc Line. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 17’ x 17’ square wall inside the grid lines. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 17 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Type Selector. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. and click OK.

29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Dimension.24 On the Tools toolbar. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Type Selector. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. and lock the dimension. click (Align).) Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . 26 On the Design Bar. 28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 27 On the Options Bar. select Wall faces. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. select Compound Ceiling: 2’ x 2’ ACT System. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for Prefer. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. click Ceiling. 25 Press ESC twice. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. under Ceiling Plans. Lock both alignments. and lock the dimension. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space.

you modify them to be bulkhead walls. enter 9'. enter 9'. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. under Ceiling Plans. and click OK. for Base Offset. Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to select the walls. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 38 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. 41 On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. for Height Offset From Level. click Modify.36 Press ESC twice. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. 46 Press ESC. click 43 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). double-click Section Display Area. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 47 In the Project Browser. double-click Section Display Area. under Constraints. 37 In the Project Browser. under Sections. and click OK. click to select it. under Sections (Building Section). under Constraints. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Next. (Element Properties).

for Type. for Structure. Select the 02 Level Floor. and click to select the walls. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. click Edit. under Ceiling Plans. click Attach. On the Options Bar. and click . View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. double-click 01 Entry Level. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 49 In the Project Browser. under Construction. press TAB until you select the wall chain. for Top/Base. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. view the ceiling structure.48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. and press ESC. click Edit/New.

Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid.54 Click OK. click Cancel. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Cancel. 58 On the Edit toolbar. click (Rotate). 56 In the Element Properties dialog.

61 Press ESC. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 123 . and press ENTER.60 Click. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. enter 45.

124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 67 Proceed to the next exercise. click Shadows Off. double-click To Building. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 64 On the View Control Bar.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 65 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows On. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 125. 66 Optionally. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 5'. click Training Files. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). and click to create a reference plane to the right. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level.rvt. and copy it to the 05 Level. under Floor Plans. and for Offset. click Ref Plane.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor over grid line B. and click to create a reference plane to the left. double-click 01 Entry Level. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_stair.

2. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 6 Select the left reference plane. shorten the right reference plane. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. click Modify. and 3. 7 Using the same method. and specify a point to create first stair flight. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. C.5 On the Design Bar. click Stairs.

click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. including its handrails. click Wall.8'' Masonry. beyond the end of the stair. The complete stair displays. and select the 2nd reference plane. Move the cursor down. 10 On the Options Bar. ■ Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . and specify a point. select Basic Wall: Generic . select Finish Face: Interior. with a message that 22 risers have been created and 0 remain. Click (Rectangle). Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. 12 In the Type Selector.

15 On the Tools toolbar. and click to select it. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. and lock the alignment. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. click Align. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 18 Using the same technique. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing.14 Draw walls around the stair.

enter 4'. and press DELETE. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. select the dimension value. 23 Select the stair. Click Modify. select Single-Flush : 36'' x 84''. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . click Door. select both reference planes. Select the wall. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. (Undo). and press ENTER. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. TIP To flip the door swing. 24 On the Standard toolbar. 21 Select the dimension. Lock the dimension. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. Select the interior face of the wall.20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 28 On the Options Bar. Select the bottom of the stair. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. for Prefer. and specify a point away from the wall. Because the dimension is constrained. select Wall faces. 27 In the Type Selector. 25 While pressing CTRL. clear Tag on Placement. The stair and walls move to the left. and press DELETE. a warning displays.

for Multistory Top Level. select 05 Roof Garden. Click OK. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors.30 On the Design Bar. For Top Constraint. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). click 36 On the View toolbar. 33 Select the stair. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. select all 4 walls. (Element Properties). Click OK. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. Under Constraints. but if you view the top level of the building. for Base Constraint. click Modify. (SteeringWheels). and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. (Default 3D View). 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select 00 Foundation. and move the cursor to spin the building model. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. 35 On the View toolbar.

and lock the alignments. click Align. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 44 On the Tools toolbar. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. under Floor Plans. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 131 . and lock the alignment. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser.38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. double-click 01 Entry Level. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. (Rectangle). 46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment.

(SteeringWheels). and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). enter 1'. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. click 59 On the View toolbar. 56 Select the shaft. 55 In the Project Browser. for Base Offset. Under Constraints. For Top Constraint. By offsetting the base. and click OK.Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. and click OK. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. on the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. click (Default 3D View). View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. (SteeringWheels). 52 In the Select Levels dialog. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click see the roof. (Default 3D View).

Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 133. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 .61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level.

7 On the Tools toolbar. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. for Underlay. select 06 Roof. 5 In the Type Selector. and then select the right face of the wall. and click View Properties. under Graphics. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. under Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Wall. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and open Imperial\i_RRB_wall_profile. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.8'' Masonry. select Basic Wall: Generic . 3 In the Element Properties dialog. The exact placement is not important. and click OK. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click (Align). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Right-click in the view. click Training Files. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

16 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Go To View dialog. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar.Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. 18 In the upper right corner of the profile. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. 14 Select the 12' 6'' vertical dimension value. click . 15 In the error dialog. 17 On the Options Bar. 20 Draw a circle with a 4' radius just below the fillet arc. click . click Lines. as shown: Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 135 . enter 32' 6''. select Elevation: South. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. click Edit Profile. and click Open View. and on the Options Bar. click Remove Constraints. and click (Circle). 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. and press ENTER. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. and click (Fillet arc). select a point on the profile to the left of the corner.

23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. click Finish Sketch.21 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views. double-click {3D}.

select Planter : 48'' x 48''. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 137. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 24 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. double-click 05 Roof Garden. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Component.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. TIP After you place the 1st planter.rvt. between grid lines C and D. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. as shown. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RRB_host. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser.

select RPC Tree Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 5'. select RPC Tree . and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. 6 In the Type Selector. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. 8 On the View toolbar. 16 Click Apply. 13 In the Type Properties dialog.5 On the Basics tab. for Type. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. double-click 05 Roof Garden. enter Japanese Cherry 5'. View the roof. click Duplicate. and on the Options Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and in the Type Selector. 11 Select one of the trees. (Element Properties). click (Default 3D View). as shown. click Edit/New. under Floor Plans. and press ESC twice. and then click OK twice. enter 5'. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 While pressing CTRL.Deciduous: Japanese Cherry . under Dimensions. 14 In the Name dialog. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. select the 2 remaining trees.15'. for Height. click Component.

21 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 25 Using the same method. For Offset. under 3D Views. and click to place the line.18 In the Project Browser. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . double-click 01 Entry Level. click Floor. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 8' below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. click Lines. 23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. enter 8'.

27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. 32 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. and click to sketch a line. click (Draw). and click to finish the line. 29 On the Options Bar. and click to finish the line. 30 On the Options Bar. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. move the cursor up 3'. move the cursor to the right approximately 4'.26 On the Options Bar. for Offset. enter 0'. and click to sketch a line. clear Chain. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

36 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 34 Select the line that you just drew. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5.33 On the Tools toolbar. 37 On the Design Bar. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 35 Select the line between grid lines A and B. click (Trim/Extend). The completed sidewalk displays. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . click Finish Sketch.

under Constraints. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. click Component. 48 On the Options Bar.Next. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. 42 Click OK twice. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. click 40 In the Type Properties dialog. 41 In the Name dialog. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 45 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. as shown: (Element Properties). RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. enter -0' 6''. near Column E5. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. select RPC Male: Alex. 47 In the Type Selector. 49 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. When you render an image. In plan view. for Height Offset from Level. and on the Options Bar. 50 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Edit/New. 44 Click OK. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. a photorealistic image displays. and click so he is facing the column. for Type. click Duplicate. enter Sidewalk. 38 Select the sidewalk.

select RPC Beetle. 55 Press ESC twice. 53 In the Type Selector. 52 Move the cursor clockwise. about 30 degrees. 54 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 51 In the Type Selector. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 143 . you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement.NOTE If necessary. select RPC Female: Cathy. and click to place her on the sidewalk.

60 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. for Offset. Next. double-click West. and on the Options Bar. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. When you select a host for a component. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. 57 In the camera view (3D View 1). and click (Element Properties). under Constraints. Select a host for the RPC components 61 Select Cathy. click Pick Host. under Elevations. 59 In the Project Browser. click the car. click Camera.56 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter -1'.

pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. and replace them with a service core. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . 67 Proceed to the next exercise. 65 Using the same method. View the front of the building 66 In the Project Browser. If the sidewalk changes height. and on the Options Bar. 64 Click the sidewalk.62 Click the sidewalk. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. under 3D Views. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Pick Host. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 145. 63 Select Alex. double-click To Building. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise.

walls. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. 3 Select the entire stairwell. click Training Files.rvt. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. After the service core is positioned. including the stairs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and shaft opening. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 05 Roof Garden.The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_service_core_. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

you delete the entire stairwell. Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. click OK. click (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels). 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 5 On the View toolbar. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 147 . click 6 On the View toolbar.rvt.4 Press DELETE. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. and open Imperial\i_RRB_core. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. click Training Files.

Click the inner top horizontal floor line. and on the Design Bar. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. and click Create Instance. double-click 01 Entry Level. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. and notice that the linked file is listed. expand Model.Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. expand Groups. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. right-click i_RRB_core. and zoom in to the linked instance. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. click Modify. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. click 16 Align the core: ■ ■ (Align).

click Modify. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. 17 On the Design Bar.■ ■ Click grid line C. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. and click to align the center. 18 Select the core. 19 On the Design Bar. 20 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). click Modify. click 21 On the View toolbar. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. (Default 3D View). and on the Options Bar. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 149 . click Ungroup. click (top down view). or if the group layout is expected to change.

and open Imperial\i_Conference. The rendering displays. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Notice the glass railing in the foreground. After you modify it. Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.22 Proceed to the final exercise. and open Imperial\i_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_.rvt. and double-click Lounge Perspective. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. click Training Files. expand Renderings. click Training Files. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Conference project. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 150. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add glass railings around the floor edges. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. where it is hosted within a railing family.rvt. in the Project Browser. You copy the railing type into your project from another project.

11 Close the warning dialog that displays. 7 Click Window menu ➤ i_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. 18 On the Design Bar. click Lines. verify that Chain is not selected.rvt. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Handrail only. 15 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. click OK. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Edit. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. and select Glass. and click to split the floor. 5 Expand Railing.Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. and expand Railings. double-click 02 Level. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 13 On the Tools toolbar. The floor sketch displays. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . 8 In the Project Browser. expand Families. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 2' to the left of grid line C. click (Split). press and hold CTRL. and Parapet. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor.

20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. move the cursor vertically 5'. and click to place it. click (Align). 23 Complete the sketch as shown. and click to draw another line. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 26 Select grid line D. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. click (Align). and lock the alignment. and click to draw another line. and click the lock to lock the alignment.19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. move the cursor vertically until the line is 5' long. and click the lock to lock the alignment. move the cursor horizontally to the right 5'. 27 On the Tools toolbar. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 25 Select grid line B. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B.

for Type. 33 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Element Properties dialog.29 On the Design Bar. enter 4''. click Finish Sketch. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset.rvt project. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. click Railing Properties. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. 31 In the Revit dialog. select Glass. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. and click OK. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 153 . click Dimension. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. Lock the dimensions. click Railing.

click Dimension. click Camera. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 39 Click Finish Sketch.37 On the Design Bar. 154 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

You can view the railing that you just added. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 155 .A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.

43 Close all project drawings. 156 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

exterior fire stairs. slight modifications to the building design have been made. and a roof garden. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. 157 . lofty ceilings. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. balconies. NOTE For training purposes.

158 .

and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. elevation. You learn how to create new views from existing views. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. 159 .Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. how to create section and elevation views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. section. including plan. you learn how to create views from a building model.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.

select Level 2. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. expand Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Duplicating Plan Views | 161 . and click OK. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans.Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 9 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 7 In the Project Browser.

11 Under Floor Plans. 12 In the Rename View dialog.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Vicinity Plan. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 13 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. enter Vicinity Plan.

hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. Duplicating Plan Views | 163 . click the current scale. Next. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker.14 On the View Control Bar. and click 1''= 80'-0''.

16 Right-click. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Hide in view ➤ Category. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 18 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in _progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.

3 In the Type Selector. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . select 1/8''=1'-0''. double-click Level 1. click Elevation. select Elevation: Building Elevation.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.

Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar.

under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click South East. ■ Move the cursor down. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 167 . 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. select Section: Building Section. expand Floor Plans. under Elevations. click Section. 11 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 1. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Type Selector. enter South East. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. under Views (all). select 1/8''=1'-0''.

18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.

click Split Segment. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 169 . drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to place it.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. Click the midpoint of the section line.

using the blue circular drag grip. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 23 On the View Control Bar. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. expand Sections (Building Section). select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. click Modify.21 On the Design Bar. and double-click Section 1. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 24 Select gridline F.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Creating Callout Views | 171 . you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. click Modify. To create each view.25 On the Design Bar.

3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Floor Plan. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale. 4 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. select 1/4"=1'-0''. double-click Level 1. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair.Resulting callout view . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Callout.rvt. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

and click to specify a point to complete the callout. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. Creating Callout Views | 173 . Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. click Modify. and select the callout boundary.■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair.

enter Enlarged Stair Plan. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 9 In the Rename View dialog. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. 7 On the Design Bar. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays.■ Select the middle grip. and click OK. click Modify.

and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. double-click Section 1. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Building Sections). ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. click Callout.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. select 1 1/2''=1'-0''. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. for Scale. Creating Callout Views | 175 . select Detail View: Detail.

double-click Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK. 18 In the Rename View dialog. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .16 Modify the callout leader as shown. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. expand Detail Views (Details). under Detail Views (Details). enter Roof Overhang Detail. 17 In the Project Browser.

Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. You change the appearance of the section mark head.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. the elevation markers. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modifying View Tag Appearance | 177 .

and click Open. click Edit/New. and click OK. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select Custom-Section Head. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags.Custom. and can be applied to the section line.rvt. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. select the current project. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. click Load into Project. enter Section Head – Custom. and click OK twice. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rfa. for Section Head. click Training Files. select the section line. and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. double-click Level 1. 10 On the floor plan. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 12 For Section Tag. Section Tail .Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Section Head .Filled. under Floor Plans. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. . select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. clear any others. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Section Tail – Filled.

click the Annotation Objects tab. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. notice the circular elevation markers that display. On the floor plan. scroll to Section Marks. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.rfa. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. select Circle. click Training Files. . 17 Under Category. and select 3. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 179 . and click OK. 15 Under Category. enter 3/4''. click Duplicate. For Dimensions ➤ Width. enter 3/4'' Circle. 22 In the Name dialog. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Custom-Callout Head. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. select 3/4'' Circle. 19 Click OK. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. 27 Click OK twice. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll to Section Line. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. and on the Options Bar. click Edit/New. and click Open. For Line Weight.Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select 3. and select 2. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. On the floor plan. Click OK. for Elevation Tag.

32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. and click OK. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. click Edit/New. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. 39 Click OK twice. click Duplicate. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 40 Press ESC. clear all others. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. for Callout Tag. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. For Corner Radius.30 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. select the current project. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. . select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. and select 7. 36 In the drawing. click the Annotation Objects tab. Click OK. and on the Options Bar. select the callout. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. enter 1/4''. 34 In the Name dialog. 43 Under Category. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Load into Project. and click OK. scroll down to Callout Boundary.

The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. masking regions. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. Creating a View Template In this exercise. select Dash. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. 46 Under Category. and visual overrides. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. To accomplish this. view regions. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. You learn to create view templates. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. expand Callout Boundary.rvt. filters. click Training Files. and select 4. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and apply it to multiple elevation views.45 For Line Pattern. 49 Click OK. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 181 .

clear Entourage. under Elevations. under Visibility. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The crop region displays as red. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 6 On the View Control bar. click (Hide Crop Region).Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. click Zoom to Fit. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. 4 On the View Control Bar. and double-click East. 9 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 5 On the View Toolbar.

grids. Callouts. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 16 In the Project Browser. Creating a View Template | 183 . enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. under Elevations. and click Create View Template From View. under Elevations. click OK. 14 In the New View Template dialog. and click OK. elevation markers. levels. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. 15 In the View Templates dialog. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 11 Click OK. double-click North. 13 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View Control bar. right-click East.10 Under Visibility.

You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. click Apply. and click OK. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Apply View Template. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. edit the crop region as before. right-click North. double-click Penthouse. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise.17 In the Project Browser. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. and the exterior area on the south side of the building.rvt. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Select View Template dialog.rvt. 19 Using the same method.

NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. under Floor Plans. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Penthouse. double-click Roof Plan. and click Properties. under Extents. Click OK twice.2 In the Project Browser. click Edit. Under View Depth. right-click. select Level Below (Level 4). select Level Below (Level 4). for Level. for Bottom. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. View Range and Plan Regions | 185 . for View Range.

select Level 4. Under View Depth. for Level. 10 On the Design Bar. for View Range. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level 4. Click OK twice.6 In the Project Browser. click Edit. and click Properties. Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Bottom. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Plan Region. click Lines. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Extents. right-click. select Roof Plan.

15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.11 On the Options Bar. for Bottom. in this case. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. select Unlimited. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). Move you cursor diagonally. Under View Depth. for View Range. click Edit. under Extents. Click OK twice. 16 On the Design Bar. the fire Using Filters to Control Visibility | 187 . select Unlimited. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. for Level. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. click Finish Sketch. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. click Region Properties. 13 On the Design Bar. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. In the left corner of the building. click Modify. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly.

select Solid Fill. click the Filters tab. under Views (all). 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 12 On the Filter tab. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and apply a color. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click <No Override>.rating of the walls. click Edit/New. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. 14 In the Color dialog. under Basic colors. Enter Hr. select the red color. 11 Select Rated Walls. under Filters. expand Floor Plans. 16 Click OK. for Color. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 10 On the Filter tab. click Override under Patterns. select Walls. and click OK. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. and click OK. for Pattern.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Add. for Rated Walls. select Fire Rating. click (New). under Categories. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 9 Click OK. Select contains. 7 In the Filters dialog. enter Rated Walls. 5 In the Filters dialog. 17 Using the same method. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Projection/Surface. and double-click Level 1. After you apply the filter. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by.

To accomplish this. click OK. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save.18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Remove. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. and click OK. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. Masking Portions of a View | 189 .

rvt. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Show Crop Region. under Floor Plans. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. and click Rename. right-click. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 5 On the View menu. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select Copy of Level 1.

12 On the Options Bar. select Invisible lines. 9 On the View Control Bar. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. Masking Portions of a View | 191 . 11 In the Type Selector. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click (Rectangle).7 On the View menu. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Masking Region. 8 Select the crop region.

you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. right-click Unit 18 Plan . Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan.14 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Finish Sketch. 1 In the Project Browser. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. under Floor Plans. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.Level 1. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress.

select Solid fill. click <No Override> to apply a color. 4 On the View Control Bar. and click Override. and click 1/4''=1'0''. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click the current scale. and click OK. under Visibility. right-click.2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click in the Patterns field. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. for Pattern. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 11 Click OK twice. click black. 3 In the Rename View dialog. for Color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. under Pattern Overrides. select Walls. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. and click OK. and click Rename. 7 Under Cut. right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 193 .

click Modify. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Visibility. 16 Under Visibility. 18 Right-click. clear Floors. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Grids. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

20 Right-click.19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. select Dash 1/16''. 23 In the Color dialog. 21 Under Projection/Surface. By using the previous method to make the selection. click Override. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. for Pattern. and click OK. 25 Click OK twice. Working with Visual Overrides | 195 . and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. under Lines. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. for Color. click <No Override> to apply a color. click a purple color.

Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar.Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. click By Category Override. click Projection Lines. 28 For Color. right-click. select a bright green color. click Modify. select the sofa. and click OK twice. 30 On the Design Bar. click . 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 29 In the Color dialog.

right-click. click . and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet.32 Select one of the lamps. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. how to add views to the sheets. 33 On the View Control Bar. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 197 . you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. click Training Files. click Sheet. right-click.rvt. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields.

Click OK.Unnamed. 5 When the title block highlights. on the Options Bar. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. 3 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Number. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). 7 On the Design Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets | 199 . expand Sheets (all). Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. For Sheet Name. enter Site Plan. click Modify. and select the title block. click Modify. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . enter A101.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved.

enter 2009-1. For Client Name. For Project Number. The new project information displays in the titleblock. Smith. enter Freighthouse Flats. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter For Approval. click Edit. for Project Address.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . MA 12345 12 Click OK. enter 15 May. For Project Status. 2009. under Other. enter J. 14 Click OK. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. For Project Name. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family.

Elevations A105 . for Name. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. select the new sheet name. and click Rename. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. right-click. Adding Views to Sheets | 201 .rvt.Elevations A106 . and click OK.Stairs In the following exercise.Layout Plan A104 .Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.rvt. you add views to these sheets. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click Save. enter Floor Plan. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Sections A108 .Elevations A107 . 17 In the Project Browser.

under Elevations (Building Elevation). 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. 4 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. click Modify. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. double-click A104 . 2 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).Elevations. and drag it to the sheet. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser.Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click to place it. under Sheets (all).Floor Plan. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place the view. double-click A102 . The red border around the view no longer displays.

and click to place it. under Sheets (all). Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser.Sections. and click to place it. double-click A107 . 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and click to place it.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. Adding Views to Sheets | 203 . 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). align it with the East elevation. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. and press TAB until it highlights. . 16 Select title bar. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all). 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for View Scale. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Design Bar. double-click A108 . zoom in to the grip. move the cursor over it. and on the Options Bar.Stairs. click Modify. select 1-1/2'' = 1'0''. 18 Under Floor Plans. and click to place it.

22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. In order to do this. under Floor Plans. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. double-click Level 1. and then make changes and deactivate the view. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers.View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. you must first activate the view on the sheet. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 205 . 21 Zoom to the stair callout. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.

zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. enter 54'. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height.Sections. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A107 . 2 Select the building section view. under Sheets (all). and click Activate View. and press ENTER. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. click Modify. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. right-click.rvt. 5 On the Design Bar.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

7 In the Project Browser.6 Right-click. double-click North. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 207 . and click Deactivate View. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated.

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. For Sheet Name. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. enter T. and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. You modify the view to hide the view title. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. The camera view displays. 7 Place the camera as shown. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. select the new sheet name. 208 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Click OK. and click Properties. enter Title Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Camera. double-click Level 1. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. After you create the sheet. right-click. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet.8 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt.

enter 5'. Under Extents. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. enter 60'. 12 On the View Control Bar. enter 420'. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region.8 On the Options Bar. Under Camera. select Far Clip Active. Click OK. for Eye Elevation. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Far Clip Offset. 11 On the View Control Bar. For Target Elevation. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 209 .

for Height. Click Apply. select Scale (locked proportions). enter 25''. double-click T . 210 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. under Sheets (all). and click to place it in the center of the sheet. 15 With the view selected. click Size.13 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. 14 Under 3D Views.Title Sheet. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Under Model Crop Size. and then click OK.

23 In the Type Properties dialog. select No. 24 Click OK twice. click Modify.17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. . 21 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 211 . and close the exercise file. enter Viewport/no title mark. and click OK. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. click Modify. under Graphics. click Duplicate. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Select the view on the sheet. for Show title. 25 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 22 In the Name dialog.

212 .

Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. Tagging Objects In this lesson. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . such as room and window schedules. You also learn to create different types of schedules. such as doors and windows. click Training Files. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.Level 1. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. Because of the open style floor plan.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects.rvt. 213 . you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. expand Floor Plans.

3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. as shown: 5 Using the same method. right-click in the Design Bar. as shown: 214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click Room and Area. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. move the cursor to the right. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). click Room Separation. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right.

create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 7 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Tags dialog. click Modify. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 215 . click Load.6 Using the same method.

click it. type 8'. 11 In the Tags dialog.rfa. click Training Files.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and press ENTER. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. The room tag number displays in blue. 13 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Room Tag. indicating that it can be edited. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. click OK. 14 For Offset. 216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and select the room tag. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. type U18-1. click Room. and click to place the room and tag. click Modify. verify that Tag on placement is selected. 16 On the Design Bar. and the rectangle contains the room tag.

and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 217 . Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. type Kitchen. and press ENTER. place rooms and tags. click Modify.18 Click the room text label. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Click to place the new room and tag. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. 23 Using the same method. type Entry. Dining. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. 22 Click the room text label. 19 On the Design Bar. Sequential letters are also supported. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. click Room.

Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). The rooms are already placed. 29 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. 27 On the Design Bar. click Room Tag. and moving clockwise.Level 2. clear Room Separation. under Floor Plans. on the Model Categories tab. expand Lines. but they need to be tagged. double-click Unit 18 Plan . click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click OK. 218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

Level 1. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 219 . you learn how to place door and window tags. clear Leader. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Tag ➤ By Category.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 31 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. expand Floor Plans. in the Project Browser. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.

click Modify. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. and press ENTER. (Element 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Identify Data. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. for Mark. and on the Options Bar. click Properties). and click OK. type U18-1. type U18-2.■ Closet door in living room 5 On the Design Bar.

and drag it down to center it in the doorway. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. Tagging Doors and Windows | 221 .9 Using one of the methods you just learned. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

double-click Unit 18 Plan . 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 22 In the Tags dialog. 20 In the Tags dialog. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Load. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser. select Door Tags. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.rfa. verify that All objects in current view is selected.Level 2. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. select Window Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged. 15 Under Category. click Training Files. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Tag All Not Tagged. click OK.

5 At the confirmation prompt. select Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category. tag all untagged windows. Tagging Other Objects | 223 . you learn how to tag furniture objects. 4 Select a dining room chair. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Yes to load a tag. select the edge to which the leader connects.rfa. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.Level 1. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 3 On the Options Bar. 29 Save the file. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. 26 Under Floor Plans. expand Floor Plans. and modify the tag placement and display. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Training Files. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Furniture Tag. 28 Using the same method. double-click Level 2. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

and drag it above the chair tag. clear Leader. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. 224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). 11 Select the tag for the table. and on the Options Bar. 12 Click the elbow control. and drag it up to form an angled leader. 14 Click Modify.8 Select the furniture in the living room. 9 Click Modify. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 13 Optionally.

double-click Unit 18 Plan . select Furniture Tag : Standard. and on the Design Bar. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table.Level 2. click Tag All Not Tagged. and click OK. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. under Floor Plans. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. Tagging Other Objects | 225 .

23 Save the file. select Furniture Tags. and click Modify. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. click Check None. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. you learn to add schedules. 22 In the Type Selector. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. 21 In the Filter dialog. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. click (Filter Selection). select Furniture Tag: Boxed. 226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK.20 On the Options Bar. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

a schedule that lists every window in the building. in which windows are listed by window type. that is. Next.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. Finally. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. Creating a Window Schedule | 227 . Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

select Windows. 9 Click OK. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. click the Fields tab. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 4 For Name. click Training Files. type Building Window Schedule. 7 Using the same method. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. under Category. and double-click Level 1. 6 Under Available fields. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. right-click in the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. select Comments and click Add. 228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. you are prompted to open one that does. right-click the schedule. click Show. expand Schedules/Quantities. and on the Options Bar. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. 13 In the Project Browser. this can be a time-consuming process. NOTE By clicking Show. Creating a Window Schedule | 229 . 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. However. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. click Close. and click View Properties. in large building models with many views. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. If no open view shows the selected element.

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. and press ENTER. under Other. clear Itemize every instance. click Edit. change the Type Mark in the first row from 10 to A. for Sort by. sorted by type mark. The window schedule is displayed. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule. and click View Properties.15 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. click Edit. under Other. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 Click OK twice. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. for Sorting/Grouping. for Sorting/Grouping. The window type schedule is displayed. Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule.

and sill conditions for a window can be found.24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. as shown: 25 In the Project Browser. and double-click Building Window Schedule. In this case. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. double-click Level 2. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. under Floor Plans. unlike shared parameters. jamb. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head.rvt. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H.rvt. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 231 . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. expand Schedules/Quantities. you cannot use them to tag objects. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and.

12 Click OK twice. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. for Name. under Other. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. For Group parameter under. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. 6 Using the same method. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Fields. under Available fields. type Head Detail. 5 Click OK. click Edit. right-click Building Window Schedule. click Add to create the new parameter. so that they are listed before Comments. select the following fields.3 In the Project Parameters dialog. click OK. select Construction. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog. Select Type. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. Under Parameter Data.

for Jamb Detail. and without releasing the left mouse button. click Group. Under Name. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. type 3/A107. Jamb Detail.Door Schedule. and for Sill Detail. type Window Details. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . You then hide the column used for the filter. select Doors. TIP To select all 3 headers.Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. for Head Detail.Level 1. For example. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. type Unit 18 . click Schedule/Quantities. click in the Head Detail header. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. expand Floor Plans. 14 On the Options Bar. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. type 2/A107. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. and Sill Detail. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. select Head Detail. type 1/A107. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 233 . under Type Mark A. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 17 Save the file. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule.

select the following fields. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). select Hidden field. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. and double-click A102 . click the Fields tab. and click OK. but is not included as a column in the schedule. verify that New Construction is selected. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. select Mark. 4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Unit 18. Select contains in the second field.■ For Phase. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 9 Click the Formatting tab. select Family and Type. Type U18 in the third field. 6 Under Available fields. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 10 Under Fields. 11 Under Field formatting. expand Sheets (all).

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.13 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. and drag it to the sheet. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. click Modify. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. click Unit 18 .Door Schedule. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 235 .

20 Save the file. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. select Rooms. and click Add. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Bold. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. click Schedule/Quantities. and click View. under Category. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Available fields. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. to the right of Header text. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 7 Under Text. select Number. 8 Click OK. 5 Using the same method.rvt.

type Building Entry. 101-106. for Name. select Corridor. type Corridor. For 104. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. add 5 more rooms. For 102. For 103. click New. 11 Using the same method. type Stair. for room 101. Creating a Room Schedule | 237 . select Storage. and press ENTER. type Storage. and press ENTER. 10 Edit the number to be 101. and press ENTER.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. For 105. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. The room Number is U17-46. next to Rows. and press ENTER. For 106.

First. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. click the bright green swatch. click the Color field. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. For Weight. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . expand Lines. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. click Room Separation. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. place rooms from a program list. and click OK. 4 Click OK twice.13 Save the file. you add room separation lines. under Visibility. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. For Room Separation. In the Lines field. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. Under Custom colors. click the Lines field. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan.rvt. and modify room names. double-click Level 1. click Override. select 9. In the Line Graphics dialog. under Projection/Surface. draw the horizontal line. under Floor Plans.

9 On the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 239 . click Room. click Modify.8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar.

12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). select 102 Storage. for Room. 13 On the Options Bar. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 11 On the Options Bar. type 8'. for Room. select 101 Building Entry. 14 For Offset.

click Modify. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. double-click Level 1. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 241 . 19 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Using the same method. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. and zoom in to the Corridor. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. under Floor Plans. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105).15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. 20 While pressing CTRL. under Schedules/Quantities. place the following rooms. double-click Room Schedule. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101.

and for all 3 finishes. select Base Finish. 30 On the Options Bar. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. and click OK. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. for Rows. click New. 24 Open the Room Schedule. under Constraints. type Units. while pressing CTRL. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. (Element Properties). select Rooms.21 On the Options Bar. under Available fields. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. and click OK. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and Wall Finish. 31 For Key Name. Floor Finish. click Modify. click Schedule/Quantities. clear Room Bounding. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click 23 On the Design Bar. and click Add. 27 Select Schedule keys. type As Selected. under Category.

37 Open the Room Schedule. under Floor Plans. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser.32 Using the same method. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Rooms. select Units. 44 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Room Style. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. click Check None. and click Add. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. click Edit. for Fields. for Available fields. 43 In the Filter dialog. under Identity Data. 33 In the Project Browser. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 On the Options Bar. under Other. click (Filter Selection). under Schedules/Quantities. 38 Under U17-8. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. for Room Style. right-click Room Schedule. and click Properties. double-click Level 1. select Units. for Room Style. and click OK. 36 Click OK twice. click (Element Properties). The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 243 .

expand Floor Plans. under Graphics. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and apply it to the Level 1 view. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). 103. for Color. right-click Level 1. and 106. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . at the warning prompt. and click OK. click the Color Scheme field. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined.46 Open the Room Schedule. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme.rvt. select Service. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 48 Save the file. under Views (all). For rooms 102 and 105. and double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 104. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. for Name. select Room Style. click 5 For Title. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. and click Properties. type Room Type. 9 In the Project Browser. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. (Duplicate). type Room Type. select Public.

click Edit Color Scheme. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 17 On the Design Bar. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 19 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. under Visibility. click the value in the Color column. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Edit. and click OK.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). 14 Click OK twice. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). and clear Room Separation. clear Visible. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . select the color legend. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. click Color Scheme Legend. expand Lines. under Schemes. select Room Type.

click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. for Swatch Width. 29 Click OK twice. and click OK. 23 Using the same method.22 In the Color dialog. respectively. under Graphics. type 1/4''. type 1''. 30 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select blue. click Edit/New. 28 Under Title Text. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. on the Options Bar. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. for Size. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. (Element Properties). under Custom color. and select Show Title. 24 Click OK. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. click Color Scheme Legend. for Color Scheme. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. under Sections. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. and select Properties. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 35 Click OK twice. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 247 . position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Graphics. select Room Type. under Sections. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. double-click Building Section. select Rooms. click Edit. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. and click OK. under Visibility. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Building Section.

and click OK. (Filter Selection). 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Units. select all the rooms in the stairwell. select Public. 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. click Check None. 45 While pressing CTRL. for Room Style. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). and click OK. under Identity Data. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. click . for Room Style. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. 42 In the Filter dialog. select Rooms. 46 Click . under Identity Data.

type Suites. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. under Key Name for the new row. and click OK. 51 On the Options Bar. for Room Style. double-click Room Style Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. and click . Creating a Room Color Diagram | 249 . for Rows. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. excluding the stairwell spaces. select Service. click New.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. under Identity Data. 54 While pressing CTRL. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser.

58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. for Room Style. 59 Under Room Area Computation. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select Areas and Volumes. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area.55 Click . verify that At wall finish is selected. select Suites. The color fill extends to the roof. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Identity Data. select the room on the left side of the top floor. The color fill will extend to the roof. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. and click OK. but not beyond it. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. under Volume Computations. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

72 On the Design Bar. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 251 . select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). for Upper Limit. 71 Click OK. for Upper Limit. the dining room. 70 For Limit Offset. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. 66 Click OK. type 0’ 0” . select Loft. 67 On the first level. select the stairwell room. under Constraints. 68 Click . and click 65 For Limit Offset. select Level 2.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. under Constraints. . type -10”. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. and the living room. click Modify.

i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.rvt. double-click {3D}. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.73 Save the file. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. under 3D Views.

EPDM.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. under Available fields. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 5 On the Design Bar. For Then by. 9 Using the same method. under Category. Clear Itemize every instance. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. Select Grand totals. select Family and Type. select Roofs. click Family and Type. click Modify. 4 In the Type Selector. and click Add. and click OK. Creating a Material Takeoff | 253 . 3 While pressing CTRL. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist .Insulation on Plywood Deck . select Material: Description. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff.

The /(1'^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. Under Field formatting. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 12 Click OK. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. click the Formatting tab. and click Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.25 4. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and under Fields. 21 Click OK. click Estimated Cost.50 1. under Other. and click OK twice. 23 For Field formatting. 19 For Type. under Available fields. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. for Name. and click Add. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. select Calculate totals. select Material: Cost. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 1. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. type Estimated Cost.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. select Calculate totals.75 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Fields. 20 For Formula. select Currency. 17 Click Calculated Value. click Edit. for Material: Cost. select Material: Area. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1'^2). 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.

not just for currency. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. ensuring consistency across families and projects. tag the line. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. for Currency. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. 26 In the Project Units dialog. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 255 . This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. you create an exiting plan for the building. adding the shared parameters to a family. select $. In this lesson. and schedule the total distance of each path. click the Format value. regardless of category. either within family components or within the project template. These shared parameters can be added to any family. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. 31 Save the file.50 The Estimated cost is calculated. for Rounding. you create a shared parameter file. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. 30 Click OK twice. The cost fields are formatted correctly. 28 For Unit symbol. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. You draw a travel path line. 29 Select Use digit grouping. can be used for any number-based parameter. Digit grouping. and are defined and stored in an external file. creating a generic tag to tag the family. 27 In the Format dialog. which inserts commas after every three digits.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost . An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. and reporting the shared parameters.

8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. for Type of Parameter. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. type OfficeStandardsParameters. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. type Exiting. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As.txt. click Training Files. select Length. 7 Under Parameters. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. 9 Under Parameters. type Travel Distance. click Create. and click Save. click Training Files. for File name. and click OK. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. type Path ID.rvt. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click New. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Name. click New.rvt. for Name. click New.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. for Name. under Groups. 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Click OK twice. and click OK.

under Parameter Data. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 9 In the Family Types dialog. for Travel Distance Formula. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 14 On the Design Bar. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. under Parameters. in the Load into Projects dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Click Training Files. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 257 . under Dimensions. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Travel Line. 12 In the Family Types dialog. under Parameters. following the equals symbol (=). select i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. type Length. and click Select. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 3 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. click Add. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. and click OK. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and select Instance. select Constraints. 11 Click OK. under Parameter Type.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 13 Click Apply. click Family Types. 8 Select Instance. and click OK. 15 If necessary. 10 Using the same method. for Group parameter under.rfa. and click OK.rvt. otherwise the family loads into the current project. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select Shared parameter. and click OK.rvt. click Add. group it under Dimensions. If you have multiple projects open.

Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click Select. select Travel Distance. 19 On the Design Bar. 24 Click OK twice.rft. under Parameters. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. click Label. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. click Label. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. under Category Parameters. click parameter(s) to label). 17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. click (Add Parameter). 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. click Training Files. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and open Imperial\Templates\Generic Tag. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. and click OK. select Travel Distance.

33 On the Design Bar. 35 Save the file. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window.rfa. 32 In the Save As dialog. click Modify. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. select Path ID. click Load into Projects. type Travel Distance Tag.rvt is selected. and move it down.28 On the Design Bar. verify that i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. for File Name. 29 In the drawing window. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 259 . and click Save. and click OK. and press DELETE. 31 Click File ➤ Save As.

under Floor Plans. After the lines are tagged. click Component. 6 Move the cursor to the right. select Chain. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Exiting Plan .rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Placing. and click in the center of the corridor. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. above the exterior door as shown.Tagging. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

12 On the Design Bar. type 1-1. 10 On the Options Bar. 13 While pressing CTRL.7 Move the cursor down.Tagging. clear Leader. Placing. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. under Constraints. 17 On the Options Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 261 . move the cursor near the right corner. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 8 On the Design Bar. click Component. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. through the door. for Path ID. click Modify. and click outside of the building. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. verify that Chain is selected. double click Exiting Plan . click Modify.Level 2. and click (Element Properties). and click OK. click Tag ➤ By Category.

19 Move the cursor up through the door. 21 On the Design Bar. and click. and click above the door to the stair. and click in the stair. 23 Move the cursor down. 20 On the Design Bar. click Component. move the cursor to the left. click Modify. 262 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path.

type Level 1 Exit Distance. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. 30 Using the same method. click Tag ➤ By Category. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 33 For Name. under Constraints. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path.Tagging. and click OK. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 263 . 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. type 2-1. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. Placing. 27 On the Design Bar. and click OK.24 On the Design Bar. . and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 28 While pressing CTRL. for Path ID. under Category. 32 In the New Schedule dialog.

and click Rename. under Schedules/Quantities. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 43 In the Project Browser. 46 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 35 Click the Filter tab. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 44 In the Project Browser. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 42 Click OK. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.rvt. type 1-. in the first field. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 41 Under Fields. and under Field formatting. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. and click Add. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Training Files. in the second field. 40 Click the Formatting tab. for Filter. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 36 For Filter by. while pressing CTRL. click Edit. select Path ID and Travel Distance. 50 Save the file. 38 For Sort by. select Path ID. and in the third field. 264 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type 2-. and click Properties. and click OK. select Travel Distance. for Filter by. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. in the third field. select contains. type Level 2 Exit Distance. select Calculate totals. select Path ID. 49 Click OK twice. under Available fields. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays.

select Walls. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. under Categories. expand C . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 265 .Drywall w/ Metal Stud. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 .Interiors ➤ C10 .Partitions ➤ C1010100 . 4 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. for Assembly Code. right-click the Design Bar. click the Value field.Fixed Partitions. and click . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Click OK twice.Partitions . TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click Properties. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. and click OK. select the following fields. click the Fields tab. 10 In the schedule.6''. and select C1010145 . right-click Generic .

NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 11 Click OK 3 times. and click Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. click the File Data Source tab. 8 In the New Database dialog. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. for Database Name.11 Close the exercise file. 3 Click New. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 9 Under Directories. and click OK to create the database. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. click Training Files. click Create. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 1 On the File menu. 266 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .mdb.mdb). 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.rvt. click OK. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. type Revit_Project. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 Click Finish. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. select a location for the database file. the database display may be different than that shown. and click Next. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. under Database.

Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. For example. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. Additionally. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 267 . A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. in addition to the Id column. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. 13 Close the exercise file. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes.

268 .

you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 269 . and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0'. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it.

you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0' to 325'. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. 270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning .Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height Relocating a Project In this exercise.

and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click Training Files. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. and double-click South. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. for Elevation Base. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. The levels in the project are not shared. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 On the Options Bar. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. If you did that now. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. and click OK. click (Element Properties). Under Constraints. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. In the Name dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. click Edit/New. Relocating a Project | 271 . 4 In the Element Properties dialog. select Shared. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0'. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).rvt. However.Shared Elevation. 6 Click OK twice. 8 Select the Level 1 line. type 1/4'' Head . expand Views (all). 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate.

you specify the new location of the project. Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 10 On the View menu. 13 On the Design Bar. you specify the point (0') from which you want to relocate the project. select Level : 1/4'' Head . The elevation of the other levels remains the same. The south elevation is displayed. 12 In the Type Selector. click Modify. and press ENTER. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. By typing 325' in this step. 272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . The base elevation now reads 325'.Shared Elevation. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. type 325'.By selecting the Level 1 line.

The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. and the Roof Plan level. select Levels 2-4. 14 In the Project Browser.The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. double-click North. under Elevations. 15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ While pressing CTRL. Relocating a Project | 273 . as well as other views of the building model. the Penthouse level.

Dimensioning on page 274. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. In this case. On the Design Bar. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. select Level : 1/4'' Head . radial. click File menu ➤ Save As. multi-segmented. Dimensioning In this lesson. click Modify.Shared Elevation.■ ■ In the Type Selector. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. 16 If you want to save your changes. In Revit Architecture. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. permanent dimensions are created automatically. You place linear. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. and angular dimensions. 274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . Creating Dimensions In this exercise.

click Dimension. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. snap to wall centerlines. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall. Creating Dimensions | 275 . expand Views (all). and are created by selecting individual reference points. and double-click Level 1.Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. dimensions are aligned. By default. select it. expand Floor Plans.

5 Move the cursor above the view. select it. 276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall.4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. and click to place the dimension.

indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. click Dimension. click Modify. Creating Dimensions | 277 . and select it. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right.6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. select the right side of the curtain wall. select the right endpoint of the planter.11 Using the same method. for Prefer. and select its left exterior face. above the plan view of the building. but below the first dimension that you placed. select Wall Faces. 14 Move the cursor to the right. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. 16 Move the cursor up. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter. 12 On the Options Bar. 278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning .

enter Linear . click Modify. 18 On the Basics tab. for Dimension String Type. and click OK. for Dimension String Type. . click Duplicate.Ordinate. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 Click OK twice. under Graphics. click Edit/New. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 In the Name dialog. 26 In the Type Properties dialog.3/32" Arial . click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. select Ordinate. The dimensions start from 0' 0" and increase moving away from the origin. click Duplicate. and click OK.Baseline. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. 25 In the Name dialog.Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. Creating Dimensions | 279 .3/32" Arial . enter Linear . and on the Options Bar. select Baseline. 23 In the Type Properties dialog.

The Dimension 32 In the Dimension Text dialog.3/32" Arial . 33 Under Text Fields. 34 Click OK. 30 In the Type Selector. enter Planter. or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . to the left. under Dimension Value. for Below. below. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above. for example Text dialog displays. .29 Select the dimension string.Baseline. select Linear . The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline. verify that Use Actual Value is selected. and in the Type Selector. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text.3/32" Arial to return to the original dimension style. select Linear .

For Prefer. click Dimension. and select it. Creating Dimensions | 281 . click Modify. select Wall faces. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. 37 On the Design Bar.35 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. 38 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). 40 Move the cursor outside the wall. and specify a point to place the dimension.

43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. and click OK. type Typ. 44 With the dimension still selected. for Suffix. 46 On the Basics tab. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog.42 Select the radial dimension. click Modify. 282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . click the dimension text..

50 Select the horizontal line.Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. For Prefer. 49 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). 51 Select the left exterior face of the planter. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. click Dimension. Creating Dimensions | 283 . verify that Wall faces is selected. 48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. you select only the wall.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. expand Floor Plans. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 284. 53 On the Basics tab. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. and double-click Level 3. When you dimension the wall. and click to place the dimension. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. expand Views (all). 284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning .52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. Automatic wall dimension Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

and click to place the automatic dimension string. select Wall centerlines. and select Widths. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. select Entire Walls. For Pick. Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. Click Options. select Openings. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select references. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 285 . Click OK. click Dimension.Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. in some cases. 286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Controlling Witness Lines on page 286. For example. When you place dimensions.7 On the Basics tab. expand Floor Plans. However. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. click Modify. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all). for a multi-segmented dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 287 . click Dimension. verify Wall centerlines is selected. select Individual References. For Pick. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select it.

9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. select the bottom right endpoint. and click to place the dimension. 288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . 10 Using the same method. select the right edge of the planter. 8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. and select it. move the cursor down.7 Using the same method.

Controlling Witness Lines | 289 . and when the wall centerline highlights. and specify a point to place the dimension.11 Move the cursor down. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. select it. Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab. 13 On the Options Bar. for Prefer. select Wall centerlines. click Dimension.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. 16 On the Design Bar.15 Moving the cursor to the right. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. click Modify. and drag the dimension down the wall. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. 19 Release SHIFT. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT. and click to place the dimension.

After you create the new family type. and using the same methods. click Modify. 22 On the Basics tab. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 291 . create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. text font. and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. 23 Proceed to the next exercise.20 Click the blue middle grip. you change the dimension tick mark. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 291. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. drag it to the right.

for Tick Mark. select Arrow 30 Degree. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. type Office Standard. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. 292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning .rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 2 Click (Element Properties). Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ Under Graphics. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Edit/New. and select the lower dimension. 5 In the Name dialog.Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

click Modify. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. 9 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select another font. and select the bottom dimension. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 293 . 7 On the Basics tab. type 1/8”. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. For Text Font. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. for Text Size.■ ■ Under Text. 10 On the Basics tab. select CityBlueprint. ■ Click OK twice.

Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. select the angular dimension on the planter. and how to add leaders to the text notes. create a new angular dimension type. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. Creating Text Annotation on page 294. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan.11 Using the same method. 294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning .

and click and drag to create a text box. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. zoom to the planter near grid line 5. click (None).rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. but below the upper dimension string. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295 . for Leader. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Text. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.

click Edit/New. click Modify. and click . Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. type 1/4'' Arial Notes. If so. 7 Select the text box. select Arc Leaders. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 In the Name dialog box. 296 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning .5 In the text box. and click OK. under Graphics. 11 Under Text. type EXISTING BUILDING. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. for Text Size. type 1/4''. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. and click OK. and click OK.

Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. ■ Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. and type Planting Bed. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). click Text. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 297 . and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter.

click Edit/New. for Leader Arrowhead. Under Graphics. and click OK. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. for New. type Standard Notes. Click OK twice. 24 On the Design Bar. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. In the Rename dialog. Under Text. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. Click Rename. click Modify. select CityBlueprint. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 298 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar.19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. for Text Font.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 299 . and click Modify.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. 31 Click in the text box. click (Arc). select Text: Standard Notes. click to place the text box. 26 In the Type Selector. and type 18'' Conc. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. 27 On the Options Bar. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. for Leader. over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. Wall. click Text.

and save the exercise file with a unique name.32 If you want to save your changes. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. 300 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning .

You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. and metal studs. add detail components. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. you trace over the building model geometry. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. These components display at the required scale. In order to detail from the building model. 301 . like a standard door header condition. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. In the callout view. plywood. you detail the roof overhang of a project building.

which means that all detail components. double-click the detail callout head. region objects. Exact location is not important. as well as detail lines. They are also view specific. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.Detailing the View In this exercise. You load detail components. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you detail the view of the roof edge. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. select As underlay. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Detail Component. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and insulation objects.rfa. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. and click OK. navigate to Imperial\Families\i_Corrugated Metal. click Training Files. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. 5 In the alert dialog. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the drawing area. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. and click Open.rvt. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After you add components. The roof overhang detail displays.

16 Click OK twice. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. and click OK. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang.8 Delete the component. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. click Duplicate. 17 In the drawing area. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. click Repeating Detail. for Pattern ➤ Detail. select Corrugated Metal. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. enter 1' 4". 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 For Spacing. click Edit/New. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. Detailing the View | 303 .

19 On the Design Bar. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\Plywood-Section. 22 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. click (Move). and click Open. click Detail Component. click Modify. click Training Files. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. click Load. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. ■ ■ Click Modify. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing .rfa. 24 In the Type Selector. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. verify that Plywood-Section : 3/4" is selected.

30 In the Type Selector.rvt.Because you still have several components to load. 29 On the Design Bar. and click Open. click Detail Component. 33 In the Type Selector. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. you load them as a group from a single file. press SPACEBAR 3 times. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x8. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Roof Edge Components. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. click OK. Detailing the View | 305 . Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. click Training Files. 31 To properly orient the component. and place it in the detail view as shown.

NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. select Chain. 37 Click Modify. 35 On the Options Bar. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. and click Modify. click the Flip instance arrows. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 38 Select the horizontal segment. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8".

Detailing the View | 307 . (Move).Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. click Insulation. 42 Click Modify. enter 5 1/2". 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. select to near side. For Offset. and on the Edit toolbar. as shown. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. click Select the left midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move start point. Select the right midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move end point. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation.

select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x12. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. select Plywood-Section : 3/4". select Rigid Insulation-Section : 2 1/2". as shown. 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 51 Click Modify.■ Click Modify. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 48 Place the component directly above the 2x8 component. 45 In the Type Selector. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. 47 In the Type Selector. and lock the component.

and press ENTER. Adding Detail Lines on page 309. they are view specific. as shown. Adding Detail Lines | 309 . Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. meaning they display only in this view.52 Proceed to the next exercise. Like detail components. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 5 Select the vertical plywood component. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 2x12 component and the roof joist. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 2x8 component. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 7 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. 4 Click Modify. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. For Offset.rvt. select Thin Lines. 2 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 2x12 component to the lower left corner of the 2x8 component. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. you add lines to your detail. enter 1/4".

310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and press ENTER. select Chain. Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click (Draw).10 On the Design Bar. enter 1/4". and clear Chain. select Medium Lines. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 2x12 component. 16 On the Options Bar. 13 Add detail lines around the 2x12 component. For Offset. as shown. as shown. click Detail Lines. 11 In the Type Selector. and draw the detail lines as shown.

select Thin Lines. 18 In the Type Selector. right-click. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). select Do not display. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. and click OK. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. 24 On the View Control Bar. and click Properties. 22 In the Project Browser. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. Adding Detail Lines | 311 . select the Penthouse level line.17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. draw the detail lines as shown. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. When you turn the display model off. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. right-click Roof Overhang Detail.

click Detail Component. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. select Vapor Barrier. 29 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. press SPACEBAR as necessary. For Offset.Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Selector. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. enter 1/2". select Break Line. and press ENTER. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

and click to place the dimension. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Adding Text Notes | 313 . specify 3/4" = 1'-0" for the scale. 3 On the Options Bar. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command.rvt. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Enter the text. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. Adding Text Notes on page 313. Click again to specify the location of the text box. you add text notes to complete the detail. 6 Click the left outer edge of the 2x12 component. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Add a dimension to the detail 5 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the View Control Bar. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. click Dimension. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 4 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow.32 Click Modify. click Text.

for Suffix. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click OK. and click the dimension text. and press DELETE. Creating Detail Components on page 314. and click OK. on the Options Bar. under Text Fields. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).rvt. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. right-click. click Select All Instances. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. 9 In the Dimension Text dialog. enter Typ.Keynotes. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.7 Click Modify. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. click Roof Overhang Detail. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click 6 In the Filter dialog. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. enter Roof Overhang Detail .. right-click. right-click. 8 Select the dimension line. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. and save the exercise file. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select a text note. and click OK. (Filter Selection).

The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote.rft. Creating Detail Components | 315 . 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. in the Type Selector. 16 Click Modify. pressing TAB. and click Open. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. select Medium Lines. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 14 Click Modify. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. while pressing CTRL. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component. and selecting the chain. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 15 Use a window to select all linework. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select all the coping linework. 7 Click Modify. click Training Files.

for File name. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 23 Using a window. click Load into Projects. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. click Load. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . delete the underlying linework. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to your preferred location. click Training Files.Keynotes view is not the open view. 30 In the drawing area. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected.rfa. 26 Press DELETE. clear Detail Items. 24 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Save As dialog. 21 To place the component. double-click it in the Project Browser. and click Save. click Detail Component. The original linework remains selected.17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 31 Using the same method used previously. While pressing SHIFT. 25 In the Filter dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. Adding Keynotes on page 317. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. and click Open. click . The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. and click OK. 28 On the Options Bar. 22 Click Modify. click Detail Component. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. enter Roof Edge. and the component can be placed in the detail. select the coping.

3/4" Plywood. and click OK. navigate to Imperial\Families\Annotations\Keynote Tag. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. you place keynotes on objects.rfa. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.B5. Click to place the leader arm.rvt. In the Keynotes dialog. Roof Edge4. Adding Keynotes | 317 .C1. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2-1/2" Rigid Insulation. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. For the metal coping. click Keynote ➤ Element. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. use keynote 07645. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. use keynote 06160. and click Open.Adding Keynotes In this exercise. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. 2 In the alert dialog.D11. click Training Files.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar.20 Ga.D11. and click . click Detail Component.I1. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing .6 Click Modify. click Edit/New. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 319. For the 2x6. 12 On the Design Bar. For the 3/4" Plywood Siding. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. use keynote 06110. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.G1. You do this in order to keynote the component. click in the Value column. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. navigate to 07645. select Corrugated Metal. For the 2x12. 17 Keynote the component. 13 Tag components: ■ (Element Properties). for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. use keynote 09250. For the 2 instances of the 5/8" Gypsum Wallboard. use keynote 06160. using keynote 07460. For the 2x8. use keynote 06110. use keynote 06110. click Keynote ➤ Element. 11 Click OK 3 times.F1. select the metal fascia with drip edge. 15 In the Type Selector.A8. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 7/8" Corrugated Steel . 18 Save the file.D1.F1. FasciaProfile_1.

2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. navigate to your preferred location. and click (Element Properties). The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Medium Line Detail Component. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel.rvt. for File name. click Detail Component. click Detail Component. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. select Medium Lines. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. 11 Press DELETE. and click Modify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and select the right end point. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. select the left end point of the reference line. and click Open. click Training Files. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Save As dialog. click Duplicate. click Load.rft. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown.Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 20 Click OK 3 times. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 15 Click Modify. enter i_Medium Line Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector. 16 Select the component. 19 In the Name dialog. click Lines. 13 In the Type Selector. 22 On the Options Bar. 6 Lock the line. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 319 . 5 In the drawing area. and click Save. click Load into Projects. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component line based.

Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. against the 3/4" plywood. 49 With the component selected. and click the lower end at the break line. 28 In the Type Selector. and assign it keynote 06110. enter EPDM Membrane. select i_Light Line Detail Component. 25 Next. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. and click . i_Invisible Line Detail Component. and i_Light Line Detail Component. and hidden) used in the view. 48 Using the same method used previously. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 42 Using the same method used previously. 24 While pressing CTRL. 34 In the Name dialog. and click Open. 38 On the Design Bar. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail.23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 32 In the Element Properties dialog.A1. (Move). and click OK. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. 30 Click Modify.G1. name the component 2 x 8 Framing. 29 In the drawing area. 44 On the Design Bar. click in the Value column. 47 Select the component. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. and click . click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 46 Click Modify. invisible. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components. click Duplicate. click Detail Component. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 41 Select the component just added.A5. and click . 31 Select the component. and assign it keynote 07260. name the component Air Barrier. 40 Click Modify. click Training Files. You add the components to the project and keynote them. click Detail Component. on the Edit toolbar. and click . 27 On the Design Bar. 37 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New.

53 On the Options Bar. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. click Detail Component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 321 . select Chain. 55 Click Modify. leaving the detail component lines. 52 In the Type Selector. and click .

click Detail Component. select the component. 67 In the Type Selector. 2 x 8 Framing. in the Type Selector. 63 In the drawing area. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane.rfa.58 Using the method used previously.A4. and assign it keynote 07260. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ i_Medium Line Detail Component. and Vapor Barrier. click Load into Projects. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. 68 In the drawing area. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Keynote ➤ Element. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. Air Barrier. select Invisible Lines. 60 On the Design Bar. 64 Save the file as i_Invisible Line Detail Component. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 61 In the drawing area. select i_Invisible Line Detail Component.rfa. name the component Vapor Barrier.

select all the keynotes. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. and click OK. and click OK. click Keynote ➤ Element. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. add a keynote for the component. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area.rvt. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 323. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text.A1. click to place the leader.A4. name the component Batt Insul. Enter 07460. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). 71 In the drawing area. and double-click i_Example_RevitKeynotes. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. Each keynote displays as a simple number. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. ■ Modifying a Keynote Database | 323 .txt. click File menu ➤ Save. and press ENTER. and press TAB.A9. select Absolute. The database file opens in a text editor. navigate to 07463. 9 In the drawing area. 6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Imperial. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. and click to place the note. In the Type Selector. and click . 72 Save the file. 3 In the text editor. Enter 07463.A1.txt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. and click Open. and press TAB.. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. under Keynote Table. click Browse. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. navigate to i_Example_RevitKeynotes. and assign it keynote 07210. under Path Type. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.69 Select the component. and close the text editor. 11 Click Modify. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. 70 Using the method used previously.

select 3" = 1'-0". 13 Click Modify. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. click Training Files. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 14 Save the file.■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. After you create a drafting view. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . The detail that you import is in DWG format. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. verify that Auto . as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components.rvt. for Scale. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Navigate to Imperial\i_Roof Edge Detail. These details do not update with changes to the building model.dwg. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. select Black and White. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. and click OK. you learn how to create a drafted detail. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. For Colors.Center to Center is selected. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. For Positioning. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail.

and click Rename. and click OK. The detail is imported as an import symbol. enter EPDM Metal Coping. 5 Click Modify. 6 In the Project Browser. click Callout. Creating a Reference Callout on page 325. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Creating a Reference Callout | 325 . right-click Drafting 1. 6 Select the callout. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 3 On the Options Bar. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).rvt. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. select Reference other view.■ Click Open.

and double-click the callout. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). 8 In the Element Properties dialog. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click OK. enter Detail . for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. click Modify. double-click A105 .Elev.Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. right-click EPDM Metal Coping./Details. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. for New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. delete the existing value. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view.No Reference.No Reference). The callout is updated with the sheet information. click Rename. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 12 Click OK twice. and click Properties. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Rename dialog./Sect.

Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Detail Component. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 327 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . 3 On the View Control Bar. for Name. enter Header @ Sliding Door. and click OK. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog.rvt. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.18 Save the file. verify that the scale is 3" = 1'-0".

select the width dimension. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Finish Sketch. click Duplicate. 15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . 14 Click OK 3 times. select Gypsum-Plaster. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. for Name. 11 In the Name dialog. 20 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 16 Select the left edge of the region. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Gyp. click . 17 Click Modify. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. select Wide Lines. 19 In the Type Selector. click Filled Region. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. 18 While pressing CTRL. Draw a rectangle as shown. click Edit/New. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. select the left and bottom edges of the region. On the Options Bar. click Region Properties. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.5 In the Type Selector. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. Board. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. and enter 5/8".

click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). (Draw). Move the cursor up.Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click 22 On the Options Bar. Select the midpoint of the upper 2x6 as the start point. 24 Select the mirrored region. and on the Edit toolbar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . and click above the top of the region as the end point. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 2x6.

select Wood . 33 Click OK 3 times. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar.25 Click Modify. 34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . in the Type Selector. enter Wood . 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Region Properties. select Medium Lines. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 29 In the Type Properties dialog. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. click (Align). 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click Filled Region. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 36 Align the wood region to the 2x6: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar.Finish. Draw a rectangle as shown. and select the right edge of the wood region. click Duplicate. Select the right edge of the lower 2x6. click Edit/New. On the Options Bar. 30 In the Name dialog. click (Rectangle). for Name.Finish. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. and click OK. verify that the thickness is 3/4". for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.

40 On the Options Bar. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . enter 1/4". sketch the new region as shown.37 On the Design Bar. click . 42 On the Design Bar. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. click Ref Plane. click Filled Region. select Medium Lines. 39 In the Type Selector. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. and press ENTER. verify that the width is 3/4" and the height is 2 1/2". 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 38 On the Design Bar. For Offset.

enter 0. Move the cursor left 1". click 48 Click Modify. 47 Click the reference plane. Select Chain. and press ENTER. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. For Offset. enter 3/8". and click to select the point. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Filled Region. and click to select the point. (Align).46 On the Tools toolbar. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. Move the cursor right 1". and click to select the point. 52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Move the cursor down 1'. and press ENTER. For Offset.

click Finish Sketch. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . 58 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. and right edges of the door panel region. select Medium Lines. top. click Detail Lines. Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 56 On the Design Bar. 60 Select the left. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. and select the bottom horizontal line. enter 1/8".54 On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend). 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch.

navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\A307 Bolts-Side. 68 Click Modify.rfa. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 69 Select the bolt. 62 Select the left detail line.61 Click Modify. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. select the height dimension. and press ENTER. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Load. enter 3". and click Open. click Training Files. click Detail Component. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 65 On the Options Bar. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.

navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\Expansion Bolts-Side. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. and click Open. 80 On the Options Bar. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. 76 In the Type Selector. 79 In the Type Selector. 71 On the Options Bar. select Wide Lines.70 On the Design Bar. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 2x6. select Thin Lines. click Detail Component. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . click Detail Lines. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 2x6. 78 On the Design Bar. click Training Files.rfa. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. click . click Detail Lines. 74 Select the expansion bolt. use the images as a guide. click Load.

87 Click Modify. (Mirror). 85 On the Options Bar. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. click . and on the Edit toolbar. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click Detail Lines.82 Select the rectangle. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 84 On the Design Bar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.

93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. and on the Edit toolbar. as shown. click Detail Lines. click (Mirror). 90 In the Type Selector. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. select Medium Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left.89 On the Design Bar. 92 Select the line.

click . 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 96 Beginning at the end of the 1/8" line. and press ENTER. select Break Line. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. click Detail Component. 99 Click Modify. select the length dimension. 95 On the Design Bar. 101 On the Design Bar. and click to place the arc as shown. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 102 In the Type Selector.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. click Detail Lines. enter 1/8". draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 97 On the Options Bar.

click Dimension. click Duplicate. and click Modify. The dimension display is updated. Because detail measurements are typically less than a foot. Select Suppress 0 Feet. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. . enter Detail Linear . select To the nearest 1/16". click Dimension. and click OK. You create a dimension style for detailing that rounds to a more precise measurement than the default. 106 Click to place the dimension. for Text ➤ Units Format. 107 Select the dimension line. 110 In the Name dialog. the new style displays only inches. 113 Click OK 3 times. click 108 In the Element Properties dialog. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. click Edit/New. For Rounding. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 339 . and on the Options Bar. 105 In the drawing area. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. 112 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. click in the Value column. 109 In the Type Properties dialog.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar.3/32" Arial. 114 On the Design Bar.

120 Under Text Fields. for Below. select Linear Dimension Style : Detail Linear 3/32" Arial. 123 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear .115 In the Type Selector. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 122 On the Design Bar. 340 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 121 Click OK. and then click the dimension text. using the Drag Text grip. select Replace With Text. click Dimension. 116 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. 124 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 117 Select the dimension line. enter See Schedule. 119 In the Dimension Text dialog. under Dimension Value. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 118 Select the wall dimension.3/32”Arial. drag the text for the smaller dimension. and click Modify. and enter Varies.

129 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 7 ½" “ @ Type B. 127 In the Dimension Text dialog. 126 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. and click the dimension text. and enter 6 7/8" @ Type A. under Dimension Value.125 Select Modify to end the command. Enter 9 ½" “ @ Type C. 130 Click OK. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 341 . select Replace With Text. 128 Click OK.

342 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click to create an arced leader. and click Modify. select the gypsum board region on the left. 135 Select the note. 136 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. and on the Options Bar. 139 Save the file. click Modify to end the command. 134 Enter Gyp. click Text. 138 On the Design Bar. click (Add Right Arc Leader). Board. 137 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. and click to place the text.Add text notes to complete the detail 131 On the Design Bar. 133 In the drawing area. 132 In the Options Bar.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. 343 . and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets. click Training Files.rvt. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click East. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial.

4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Symbol. for Number of Leaders.Hexagon.rfa. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. type 1. 8 Select the keynote. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar.

under Identity Data. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. type Seal existing doors and insulate. and click above the tag to place the copy. for Text. 12 On the Edit toolbar. click (Copy). 13 Select the tag. Creating a Note Block | 345 . and click OK. click (Element Properties). on the Options Bar.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected.

position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. click (Element Properties). Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. and click. type B. on the Edit toolbar. 16 For Tag. type Repair existing door surround.14 With the copy selected. 17 Click OK. (Mirror). 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 15 For Text. 18 Using the same method. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. click Copy. 19 With the tag selected. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building.

click Modify. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 347 . continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Tuckpoint as required. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. and moving counter-clockwise. Clean exterior brick wall. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Repair existing door surround. Repair as required. using the table as a reference. Clean existing concrete loading dock.21 On the Design Bar. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Remove all existing windows. 22 Optionally.

Elevations. and click Add. 27 In the column header (text). 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. type Mark. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. Clean cut and repair wall as required. and click OK. format. expand Schedules/Quantities. select Exterior Construction Notes. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Tag.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. and drag it to the sheet. and click Add. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. and select Bold. expand Sheets (all). 26 Click OK. select Tag. verify that Arial is selected. for Header text. and double-click A103 . select Center. Create. type 1/4''. for Note block name. 28 In the Project Browser. for Heading. for the value. type Exterior Construction Notes. for Sort by. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . under Available fields. type Description. and for Alignment. On the Formatting tab. Select Text. On the Appearance tab. 29 In the Project Browser.

1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Using Drawing Lists | 349 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt.Title Sheet. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. under Sheets (all). 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click T . you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. 33 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.rvt.31 On the Design Bar. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise.

6 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the sheet. for Filter by. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. type T.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. 5 In the list title field. expand Schedules/Quantities. select does not equal. select Sheet Number. The drawing list displays. ■ 4 Click OK. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click Add. Select Sheet Name. select Sheet Number. for Sort by.Title Sheet. under Sheets (all). and click Add. select Sheet Number. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. On the Filter tab. select Sheet Index. in the second field. in the first field. and in the third field. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. under Available fields. 7 In the Project Browser. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. double-click T .

Finally. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. On construction documents. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. windows. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. On construction documents. and door frames. For the text. door frame schedule. doors. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. Training File Using Legends | 351 . building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends.9 On the Design Bar. and so on). NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. click Modify. 11 Save the file.

Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. 9 For Text Font.rvt.Open Level Head . Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Name. click .Circle Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote . 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 6 On the Options Bar. click Text. click Duplicate. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. type 1/8''. for Name. type Typical Symbol Legend. click Symbol. you create a text type with the necessary size. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . 2 In the New Legend View dialog. click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Arial. and click OK.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. type Legend Text. 10 For Text Size. and click OK twice. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK.

16 In the Project Browser. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. expand Legends. and for Leader. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. and click to place it. Creating a Symbol Legend | 353 .Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector.Site Plan/Floor Plan. 14 Working from the top down. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click Typical Symbol Legend. and double-click A101 . drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. expand Sheets (all). verify that is selected. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser.

under Sheets. double-click A102 . 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. click Modify. and click to place it. 18 On the Design Bar. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark.Unit 18. 19 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 23 Save the file. click Modify. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 21 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark.17 In the Type Selector.

Creating a Component Legend | 355 . select 3/4'' = 1'-0''. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Legend Component. 3 For Scale. For View. 9 Select the second wall. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. and press ENTER. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. select Section. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. and click OK. for Family. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Name. For Host length. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.rvt. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. 8 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. type 3'. 7 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. type 4th Floor Wall Types. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. click Modify. 6 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. 2 In the New Legend View dialog.

NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. 13 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. for Leader. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 11 In the Type Selector.'' 14 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Text. 12 On the Options Bar. click to add text without a leader.Add titles to the legend components 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.

19 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component.Add text to the legend 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 18 Type the following text. Creating a Component Legend | 357 . and click Modify on the Design Bar: 1'' Decking 2x4 Stud 1'' Decking. 17 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. click to add text with a single-segment leader.

click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. drag it onto the sheet. 24 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Project Browser. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Level 4. 21 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Place the legend on a sheet 20 In the Project Browser. under Legends. select 4th Floor Wall Types. under Floor Plans. 23 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. and drag it to the new sheet. right-click Sheets (all). and click New Sheet.

indicating that it captured the wall type properties. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 27 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 31 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. Match a component type 30 On the Tools toolbar. Tile views in the drawing window 26 In the Project Browser. select the Wall Type 2 component. 28 In the Project Browser. 29 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. Creating a Component Legend | 359 . double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. click Modify to end the command. The open drawings are both visible. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing.25 On the Design Bar. click (Match Type). double-click Level 4. under Floor Plans.

33 Select the patio divider wall. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall.32 In the floor plan view. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. select Detail Level: Medium. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 34 On the View Control Bar.

You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. These changes can be due to owner requests. double-click Level 4.35 Optionally. under Floor Plans. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. In this exercise. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. Using the table. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed.rvt. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. or changes in building material availability. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. You can create a sequence of revisions. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. contractor inquiries. click 36 Save the file. Using Revision Tracking | 361 . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions.

the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. For example. yet as concise as possible. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. In most instances. In general. 7 Under Show. If Visible is not selected. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. type a date. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. When you use this option. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. When Issued is selected. verify that Per Project is selected. the revision is locked and issued to the field. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. 5 For Description. if the active revision is number 1. for Numbering. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. If you select Per Sheet.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions.

Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. Sketching Revision Clouds | 363 . Revision clouds have read-only properties. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. click Modify. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 4 On the Edit toolbar. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. you make changes to the project floor plan. 9 Save the file. click (Move). 3 Select the divider. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. including revision number and revision date. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. double-click Level 4. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Floor Plans.rvt. 5 Select the divider. 6 On the Design Bar. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. move the cursor up. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.8 Click OK.

click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. and click OK. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. select Snaps Off. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. In the Snaps dialog. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. 8 In the drawing area. click near the partition you moved. click Revision Cloud.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. for Line Weight. select 6. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. Training File Tagging Revision Clouds | 365 . The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. click the Annotation Objects tab. you load a revision tag into the project. 17 Save the file. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 16 Click OK.

click OK. under Floor Plans. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. you create additional revisions in the revision table. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes.rfa. click Tags. 5 In the Tags dialog. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 In the Tags dialog. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. Because you chose to number by project. 4 On the Options Bar. you need to add one. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. 10 In the drawing area. notice that Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. select Leader. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. scroll down to Revision Clouds. and because the revision is the first in the project. 11 Click to place the tag. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. Training File 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . the tag is displayed inside the cloud. the cloud is tagged as number 1. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You then issue a revision. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. 12 Save the file. double-click Level 4.rvt. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. click Tag ➤ By Category. Working with Revisions In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Revision Tag. 6 Click Load. 7 In the left pane of the dialog.

Unnamed. type Modify Paving Area. you prevent further changes to the revision. Working with Revisions | 367 . Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 8 Add another revision row. under Sheets. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. NOTE After you issue a revision. select Issued. 9 Click OK. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. and click OK. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. and enter a date for the revision.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You do this by issuing the revision. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 7 For Description. double-click A107 . with the description Relocate Door. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. click Add. You can continue to add revisions.rvt. and enter a date. you can no longer modify it.

13 Click Finish Sketch. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. click to add a revision clouds. 12 In the drawing area.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. apply Seq. 3 . select Tag ➤ By Category. 10 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Options Bar. under Sheets (all).Modify Paving Area. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. double-click Level 4. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. 20 On the Project Browser. 11 On the Drafting tab. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown.Unnamed. select Seq. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. double-click A107 . in the drawing area. 2 . 19 To add tags. select Revision Cloud. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select the revision cloud. 17 Using the same method learned previously. for Revision. under Floor Plans.

In order to make formatting changes (appearance. For each revision. 26 In the drawing area. Working with Revisions | 369 . select the titleblock. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. and rotation) to the revision schedule. clear Issued. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. beginning with "D". You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. for Numbering.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. for Sequence. 25 Click OK twice. You do this so that the revision can be changed. height. delete the first 3 characters. select Alphabetic. you edit the titleblock family. Click Options.

Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. for Build Schedule. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. 28 In the alert dialog. select Bottom-up. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. right-click Revision Schedule. and drag it above the schedule area. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. Select Grid lines. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Edit. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. click Yes. click Load into Projects. click Edit Family. 34 On the Design Bar. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. click Yes. 33 Select the schedule header. and press DELETE. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. for Appearance. Clear Blank row before data. and click Properties. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. under Other. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. Select Outline. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. click Modify. and then zoom in to the revision schedule.27 On the Options Bar.

Working with Revisions | 371 . right-click Revision Schedule. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. select the revision schedule. When the height property is variable. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Rev.. select 90° Counterclockwise. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. 40 Select the revision schedule header. and on the Options Bar. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. and click Properties. select User defined. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. for Rotation on Sheet. 46 Click OK twice. 45 On the Appearance tab.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. for Height. for Heading. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. under Other. for Formatting. open the titleblock family for editing. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. click Edit. With a user-defined height. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously.

50 In the Reload Family dialog. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. click Yes. you learn to import information (such as images. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. text. click Load into Projects. 372 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. 51 Save the file.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

click to add text without a leader. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. and place it on a sheet. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.JPG. click Text. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.rvt.Title Sheet. 1 In the Project Browser. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Importing Image Files In this exercise.rvt. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. double-click T . click Modify. click Training Files. for Leader. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. Importing Image Files | 373 . double-click T . under Sheets. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet.

The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 6 Select the text. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture.doc text file in another window. with the new text box still selected. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. Training File 374 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 11 Save the file. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. click Modify.

click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 3 In Microsoft Excel.xls.JPG. This process may vary from system to system. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. select the document writer. click Training Files. click Desktop. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. Importing Spreadsheets | 375 . for Name.Unit 18. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 5 Click OK. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 12 Save the file. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. under Sheets. and saved as Fixture Schedule. type Fixture Schedule. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. and click Save. This step has been completed for you. click Modify. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A102 . NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format.JPG. for File name. 4 Under Printer.mdi.rvt. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. click File menu ➤ Print. This exercise demonstrates a common method. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 10 On the Design Bar. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog.

376 .

The large floor plan. you break up the plan into sections. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. or footprint. as well as a large lab building.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. 377 . To effectively document this project. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. called dependent views.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views. click Training Files.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 379 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. double-click Level 2. 4 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Dependent on Level 2. for Name. and the model crop is the interior crop region. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar.Aviary. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . select the crop region. 6 In the drawing area. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. The dependent view opens.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. and click Rename. under Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. enter Level 2 . The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 5 Click in the drawing area. 2 In the Project Browser.

9 On the View Control Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . click (Hide Crop Region).8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

right-click Level 2. 11 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .10 Click in the drawing area. and on the Zoom flyout. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. for Name. right-click Dependent on Level 2.Labs. 12 In the Project Browser. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 13 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 15 Select the crop region. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. enter Level 2 . click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout.

click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. click Matchline. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. click (Hide Crop Region). 20 Click in the drawing area. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. under Floor Plans.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . double-click Level 2. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.

click Finish Sketch. Click above the left corner of the lab building. and click. 24 On the Design Bar. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Move the cursor left about 16'. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 385 . Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.Unnamed.Aviary.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. and drag it onto the sheet. expand Sheets. select Double Dash 5/8''. for Line Weight. click the Annotation Objects tab. 28 For Line Pattern. click Level 2 . under Floor Plans. and click Rename. 31 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. right-click A101 . click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click OK. enter Level 2 Aviary. 33 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 27 Under Matchline. select 9. for Name.

double-click Level 2. click View Reference. for Target view.Labs dependent view on the sheet. and place the Level 2 . Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 39 On the Options Bar. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . under Floor Plans. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. 386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 36 Use the same method to create another sheet.35 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Aviary is selected.

43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 41 On the Options Bar. click Zoom To Fit. 44 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 45 On the Zoom flyout. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. for Target view.Labs. select Floor Plan: Level 2 .The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 387 . 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

48 Select the crop region. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. after modifying the annotation crop region. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. double-click Level 2 .Aviary. 49 If. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click (Show Crop Region). click the far right control. 47 On the View Control Bar. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference.46 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. right-click.

and click Apply Dependent Views. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 389 . expand Level 1. and click OK. 51 On the View Control Bar. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. right-click Level 2. but are not placed on sheets. 54 In the Project Browser. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 55 On the Zoom flyout. 53 In the Select Views dialog. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. 52 In the Project Browser. select all views in the list. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). under Floor Plans.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). click Zoom To Fit.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Zoom To Fit. click Training Files. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 2 In the Project Browser.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click South Elevation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click South Elevation. 390 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . The matchline is already placed in the view. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise.57 On the Zoom flyout. and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views.

6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. cropping the view to the aviary. for Name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click OK. and click OK. and click Rename. select the Crop Region. and drag it toward the center of the view. right-click South Elevation. 8 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename.The dependent view opens. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 7 On the View Control Bar.Left. enter South Elevation . enter South Elevation . expand South Elevation. for Name. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 11 Select the crop region. click (Hide Crop Region). 3 In the Project Browser. cropping the view to the lab building.Right. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 391 . right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 5 In the drawing area. 9 In the Project Browser.

click South Elevation . 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. 18 In the Project Browser. under Sheets.13 On the View Control Bar. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and drag it onto the sheet. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. click South Elevation . for Name. under Elevations. 16 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. under Elevations. and drag it onto the sheet. right-click A103 Unnamed. 392 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . enter South Elevation. and click Rename. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Left. click (Hide Crop Region). 20 In the Project Browser.Right.

22 On the Design Bar. for Target view. click View Reference. 28 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. select Elevation: South Elevation . 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. double-click South Elevation.Left is selected.Right. click Modify. for Target view. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 393 . verify that Elevation: South Elevation . 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 23 In the Project Browser. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. 25 On the Options Bar.

31 In the Project Browser. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. click Modify. double-click A103 . Right-click the view. and click Activate View. Select the crop region.South Elevation. and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.30 On the Design Bar. 394 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . NOTE If the view references are not visible. under Sheets (all).

Viewing and Rendering 395 .

396 .

you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting. Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 10 In this tutorial. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model. Daytime rendering of the pool house 397 . you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model.

When you complete these changes. you specify options that define the model environment. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. add trees to the building site. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. the pad. and create the perspective view that you want to render. you: ■ ■ ■ change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall. After you create the perspective view. you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. and then render a final exterior view. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. In this exercise.Nighttime rendering of the pool house You learn to create and apply materials to the building model. 398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 399

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 401

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 403

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 405.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 405

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 407

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Perspective View on page 409.

Creating a Perspective View
In this exercise, you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render.

Creating a Perspective View | 409

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open, on the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point:

Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera.

Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.

The perspective view displays.

410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 Zoom out, and select the crop boundary. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground, as shown. Depending on camera placement, the back wall of the yard may be cut off.

Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site, and adjust the field of vision, as necessary. If the camera is not shown in the view, in the Project Browser, right-click 3D View 1, and click Show Camera. With the camera shown, the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view.

Creating a Perspective View | 411

6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1, and click Rename. 7 In the Rename View dialog, enter Exterior - Day, and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser, double-click Exterior - Day to open the view, and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.

10 Save the file. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 413.

412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating the Exterior Rendering
In this exercise, you specify the time and location settings for the rendering, and render a daytime view of the exterior.

You then duplicate the view, modify render settings, and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Exterior - Day.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 413

Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar, click (Show Rendering Dialog).

You create a location and time for the rendering. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings, see Re-orienting the Project on page 453. 3 In the Rendering dialog, under Lighting, for Sun, select Edit/New. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, select Spring Equinox, and click Rename. 5 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Spring Equinox - Santa Monica, 3pm. 6 Click OK twice. 7 In the Rendering dialog, under Background, select Sky: Cloudy. You adjust cloud settings as required. In this case, the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. NOTE If a background image is required, export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. 8 Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium, and click Render.

414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

9 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the model. After the image is rendered, you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open.

10 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the rendering. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog, click Export. 12 In the Save Image dialog:
■ ■ ■

In the left pane, click Desktop. For Files of type, select Portable Network Graphics (*.png). Click Save.

The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. 13 Close the Rendering dialog.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 415

Night view open. under 3D Views.Flat Round : 60W . and select the last light. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Night.Flat Round : 60W .Exterior . click Render. select the first light. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. under Ungrouped Lights. 16 With the Exterior . under Lighting.Flat Round : 60W . click OK. dialog. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Flat Round : 60W . and click Artificial Lights. add 30 :Sconce Light . and click OK. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. right-click Exterior . enter Pool Lights.Night. for Name. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .120V through 14 :Sconce Light . and click OK. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . you duplicate the view and change the settings. for Scheme. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. verify that Pool Lights is selected. click Dialog). under Group Options. under Group Options. for Name.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser.Day. press and hold SHIFT. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. under Ungrouped Lights. enter Pool House Lights. click New. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog.120V. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. and click Move to Group. and click OK. on the View Control Bar. click New. 25 Using the same method. To select a sequential list. select Exterior: Artificial only. 22 Using the same method. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 27 In the Rendering dialog.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . 24 In the New Light Group dialog. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior .Day view to Exterior .120V to the Pool Lights group. To create a similar view using different rendering settings.

Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. click Adjust Exposure. click Show the model.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. under Image. 30 In the Rendering dialog. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View on page 417. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. In this example. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. for Exposure Value. Rendering an Interior View | 417 . enter 4. and click OK. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. you change the brightness of the exposure. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. After the image is rendered. 32 Save the file.

define the perspective view and rendering settings.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. and finally.rvt. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. render the views. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Adding RPC People In this exercise. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

click Modify. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. and on the Edit toolbar. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. click Component. the person’s line of sight. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. and place the component inside the pool house. Adding RPC People | 419 . Exact placement is not important. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Select the figure. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. double-click Level 1. ■ (Rotate). select RPC Female : YinYin.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered.

10 In the Type Properties dialog. In order to see the figure’s reflection. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. you can enable this option. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. for Render Appearance Properties. 12 Click OK 3 times. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. By default. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click Edit. on the Options Bar. select Cast Reflections. under Parameters. 13 On the Design Bar. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click (Element Properties). under Identity Data. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. click Modify.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. 14 Save the file.

c_Pool_House_in_progress. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process.15 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 421. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.rvt. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 421 . You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. click Camera.

5 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the Project Browser. select Section Box. under 3D Views. right-click 3D View 1. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. and click OK. 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Properties. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering.The perspective view displays. under Extents.

10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. double-click Level 1. in addition to the 3D view. under Elevations (Building Elevations). select the section box. double-click South. In order to accurately adjust the section box. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 423 . 9 In the Project Browser. 11 In the 3D view. 8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

13 In the South Elevation view. 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . right-click. 14 In the 3D view. size the box as shown. select the section box. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.12 In the floor plan view. size the box as shown.

Creating the Interior Rendering on page 425. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. and render the interior view. doors that contain windows or glass. To create a daytime view. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 425 . you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. and curtain walls. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. 17 Save the file. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior.15 Maximize the 3D view.

for Setting. select Draft. select Interior: Artificial only. 7 Under Quality. click (Show Rendering Dialog). Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. under 3D Views. for Scheme. 8 In the Rendering dialog. 5 Click Artificial Lights. under Lighting. After these settings are established.Night. and click OK. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. click Render. enter Interior .rvt.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. right-click 3D View 1. 3 On the View Control Bar. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. and click Rename. and click OK. c_Pool_House_in_progress. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. You can specify a lower quality. you turn them off for this scene. 4 In the Rendering dialog. clear Pool Lights. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. 2 In the Rename View dialog.

(Show Rendering Dialog). right-click Interior . Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. in order to turn on daylight portals. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . Creating the Interior Rendering | 427 . and click Render. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. select Edit.Day. see the Revit Architecture Online Help.Night. select Interior: Sun only.9 Close the Rendering dialog. click Copy To Custom. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Region. The preset schemes are read-only. for Sun. but the space will receive standard daylighting. select Spring Equinox . you must create a custom setting. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. for Daylight Portal Options. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. and click OK. 17 In the Rendering dialog. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. 3pm. for Scheme. By default they are turned off. You create a view for the interior during the day.Santa Monica. For sunlit interiors. In this case. For more information on daylight portals. 13 In the Rendering dialog. select Curtain Walls. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. click 14 For Setting. the daylight portals can be turned on. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render.

select the column on the right.18 In the Rendering dialog. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. and on the Options Bar. click Properties). and close the Rendering dialog. enter 1. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. (Element 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter 10. under Image. For Saturation. 20 In the Rendering dialog. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. click Show the model. click Adjust Exposure. In the next steps. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. Click OK. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value.

For Bump. select Scale (locked proportions). 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Creating the Interior Rendering | 429 . 28 In the Rendering dialog. 26 Click Update Preview. For Amount. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. add a bump map to create texture. and click Render. select Based on wood grain. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. clear Region. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. select Wood. For Width. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. 32 In the Rendering dialog. and on the Options Bar.6. 30 In the drawing area. for Resolution. Click OK. 23 With the column still selected. As size and DPI are increased. under Output Settings. You change the varnish setting. select High. click (Show Rendering Dialog). for Setting. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. select the crop boundary. click the dimensions for Size. 24 In the Materials dialog. click OK. the render time increases significantly. and click OK. 29 In the Rendering dialog. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. select Printer. select Unfinished.22 In the Element Properties dialog. For Rotate. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. enter 90. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. enter 5''.

Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. but you can also define it in a 3D. elevation. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. Usually. or section view. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. independent of the Revit Architecture software.The rendered image displays. In a plan view. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. The walkthrough path is a spline. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough.

Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. If you prefer to use metric values. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. on the Options Bar. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and change unit formats as desired. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise.rvt. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. proceeds through the dining room. verify that Perspective is selected. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and ends in the far corner of the living room.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Walkthrough | 431 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. expand Views (all). and open Common\c_Townhouse. click Training Files. click Walkthrough. expand Floor Plans. and double-click 1st Floor.

expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. 432 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . on the Options Bar. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. and double-click Walkthrough 1. click Finish.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown.

10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. click the dimensions for Size. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). for Width. 12 On the View menu. Creating a Walkthrough | 433 .8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. and select the crop boundary. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. 16 On the Options Bar. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 11 Under Change. select the crop boundary. enter 16''. enter 1. If it is not. enter 9''. 17 Click . click Edit Walkthrough. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. and for Height. and click OK. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. verify that Field of view is selected. for Frame. 14 Click . and click OK.

clear Far Clip Active.rvt. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. click Edit Walkthrough. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. double-click 1st Floor.The walkthrough plays. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 434. and click OK. c_Townhouse. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. proceed to the next exercise. click (Element Properties). Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 434 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . press ESC. 2 On the Options Bar. under Extents. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing.

Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 435 . 7 Click the third key frame position.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). You can move any camera target or key frame position. and drag it to the location shown. for Controls. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. select Path. 6 On the Options Bar. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.

3 Under Format. and click OK. under Output Length. . select <Shading>. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. 8 If you want to save this exercise. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. enter 15. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Townhouse. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. hidden line. Recording the Walkthrough on page 436. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. under Walkthroughs. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. or rendering. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. on the Options Bar.rvt. specifying the number of frames. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. double-click Walkthrough 1. The walkthrough is recorded. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. and click Save. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. shading with edges. shading. click Edit Walkthrough. and click OK. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 9 To play the walkthrough. When you export the walkthrough. reducing the size of the image. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. for Model Graphics Style. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. If you are unsure of what option to use. for Frames/sec. click File menu ➤ Save As. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. 436 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for Compressor.

Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. More specifically. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. In this tutorial. 437 . ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building.

Creating a Solar Study . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Courtyard View In this exercise. click shown. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis.rvt. as shown. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. click Camera. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. as 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. 4 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). and double-click 01 Entry. click Training Files. A 3D view is created. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. expand Views (all).

and save the exercise file with a unique name. 3 On the Design Bar. click Save As. right-click 3D View 1. as shown. and click Rename. if necessary. you create a section cutaway view. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Modify. double-click 01 Entry. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. 7 In the Project Browser. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. 9 On the File menu.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.Courtyard View. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 439. click Section. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. under Floor Plans. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 439 . 8 In the Rename View dialog. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. expand 3D Views. enter Solar Study .5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and.

right-click Section 1. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click Modify. click Modify. 8 In the Rename View dialog. click . 6 To view the section. click 10 On the View toolbar. expand Sections. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu.5 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 On the SteeringWheel. as shown. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. (SteeringWheels). and click Rename. double-click the section head. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 7 In the Project Browser.

as shown. under Floor Plans. clear Section Boxes. 17 To hide the section box. 18 On the File menu. click Save. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 441. On the Annotation Categories tab.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. and click OK. 5 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 441 . then Fine. including the house. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. 4 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. 6 In the Rename View dialog. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout.14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. In some cases. and click Rename. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. right-click {3D}. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. you create a plan cutaway view. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. and click OK. Typical plan views. under Floor Plans. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. double-click 01 Entry. under 3D Views. 16 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. then select Medium. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. click . 15 In the Rename View dialog. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. and click Rename. do not display many elements in 3D. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. click (SteeringWheels). and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 16 On the View Control Bar. so you can see into the building from the top. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Modify. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. 15 Select the Roof.8 On the View toolbar. as shown. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 11 On the Design Bar. 9 On the SteeringWheel. as shown.

17 On the View Control Bar. and preview the effects of each study as an animation.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. 21 On the File menu. and click Rename. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 18 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Rename View dialog. click Save. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 443 . under 3D Views. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 20 On the View Control Bar. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . right-click {3D}. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. under 3D Views. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice.

as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. single-day. click click OK. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. You can create a still. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View Control Bar. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. and time range. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. or multi-day solar study. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study .Creating Solar Studies . USA is selected. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. select Los Angeles. click . and click OK. . For the Multi-Day solar study. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. date. 9 In the Name dialog. leave the slider at 50. Click the Single-Day tab. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. 10 Under Place. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field.Boston. you specify the location. you specify the location. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . For this study. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. for City. 3 Select Cast Shadows. expand Views (all). For the Single-Day solar study. expand 3D Views. MA. CA. USA. and time.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click Duplicate. date range. Los Angeles. click . 4 For Sun Position. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. enter Summer Solstice.

enter Winter Solstice. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. click OK. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. on the Single-Day tab. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. and click Duplicate. confirm that Summer Solstice. enter 10 and press ENTER.Courtyard View is currently displayed. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. Los Angeles. click Save. Los Angeles is selected. select December 22. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. 2008. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. click . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 2008. 7 On the Options Bar. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Date. select Winter Solstice. for Sun Position. 19 On the File menu. 6 On the View Control Bar. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Frame. 14 In this case. Clear Ground Plane at Level. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. select June 22.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Frame. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. and click OK. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. click OK. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. 8 On the Options Bar. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 445 . ■ For Time Interval. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 445. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. enter 20 and press ENTER. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. Los Angeles. 16 In the Name dialog. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. For Time Range.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. and click OK. click .

13 On the View Control Bar. click To display the next sequential frame. click To play the animation from start to finish. The solar study animation plays. click . showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. click . 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . and click OK. for Sun Position. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. . PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail.■ To display the next key frame. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. . under Floor Plans. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. click OK. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. select Summer Solstice. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. Los Angeles. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. approximately as shown. click Text. on the Single-Day tab. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house.

verify that Cast Shadows is selected. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. as shown. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Exporting the Study as AVI | 447 . 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. click . Click and enter Dining. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. as shown.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. click . click Lines. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. approximately as shown. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. On the Options Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 8 For Sun Position.

9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. if necessary. On the Annotation Categories tab. under Output Length. clear Section Boxes. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click OK. ■ For Frames per second. 12 In the drawing area. select Section Boxes. verify that the value is set to 15. Los Angeles. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. and click OK. select Frame Range. 15 To hide the section box. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. select Summer Solstice. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. and click OK. 11 To display the section box. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. as shown. and enter 5 to 50. select the section box. on the Single-Day tab. 14 Click outside of the section box. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain.

you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. verify that Hidden Line is selected. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 449. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. For Frames per second.■ ■ Under Format. Click OK. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. For Files of Type. or frame. for Model Graphics Style. click OK. verify that Hidden Line is selected. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. click . ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. To maintain the proportions of the frame. for Compressor. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. For Dimensions. For File Name. select Winter Solstice. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.Los Angeles. select AVI Files. for Model Graphics Style. select Frame Range. To view the animation. Exporting a Study as PNG | 449 . verify that the value is set to 15. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. Under Format. enter 450 in the first field (width). 21 Proceed to the next exercise. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. on the Single-Day tab. 2 On the View Control Bar. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. of the animation separately. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . 3 For Sun Position. under Output Length. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and enter 5 to 10. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. Los Angeles. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. you open each image. and click OK.

The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop.Los Angeles. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. select PNG. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. For Files of Type. depending on the Frame Range. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . For File name. Click OK. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. or any single-frame format. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. 8 Click Save. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. In this example.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click the Desktop icon. under 3D Views. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. as shown: 9 On the File menu.■ For Dimensions. or GIF. BMP. click Save. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. enter 450 in the first field (width). TIFF. such as JPEG.

3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts.2 Select the section box in the drawing area. as shown. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 451 . NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.

Boston. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Week Interval. select One week. click OK. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. For Time. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. MA. for Sun Position. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . and click OK. and click OK. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. For Time Interval. 12 In the Name dialog. specify 2:00 pm. and click Duplicate.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. click the Multi-Day tab. 8 On the View Control Bar. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. for File name enter 2pm . and on the View Control Bar.Los Angeles . USA. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Section Boxes. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 5 Select the roof. On the Annotation Categories tab.

and click Save. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. for File Name. Re-orienting the Project | 453 . ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog.West or North . The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. 17 On the View Control Bar. for Compressor. click OK. such as East . 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. under Floor Plans.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. you mirror all model elements. In the Length/Format dialog.South. model views. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click 01 Entry. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). Click the Desktop icon. and click OK. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. and annotations in non-drafting views. When you mirror a project. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway.

For additional information. 2 In the drawing area. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. select East . and click OK. 6 On the Standard toolbar. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .West. The project is mirrored along the East . see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North.West axis. click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 5 In the warning dialog. In this exercise. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. under 3D Views. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. right-click. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. select the roof. Then.

click Apply. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. and click OK.3 On the View Control Bar. select Cast Shadows. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. click . 12 Under Date and Time. 11 For Sun Position. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and select Winter Solstice. 5 For Sun Position. specify 11:00 AM for time. click . 10 Under Date and Time. change the time back to 12:00 PM. click the Still tab. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Orienting to True North | 455 . select Summer Solstice. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. For example. click . to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. 8 For Sun Position. and click OK. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. on the Still tab. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

and select Winter Solstice. click the Still tab. for Orientation. When a project is started.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 456 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry. and click Properties. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. 14 On the View Control Bar. right click 01 Entry. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. click OK. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. This process establishes the view setting to True North. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). 19 In the Project Browser. the view settings must be set for True North. 15 For Sun Position. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. select True North. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North.

■ To establish the True North direction. ■ To establish the new direction of True North. The floor plan rotates in the view. Orienting to True North | 457 . as shown. click toward the top of the screen. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North.

select Project North. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry.23 In the Project Browser. select Summer Solstice. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. 32 On the View Control Bar. and click Properties. click . for Orientation. and click Element Properties. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 28 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. right-click 01 Entry. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. for Orientation. and click OK. under 3D Views. 33 For Sun Position. and click OK. right-click. click the Still tab. right-click. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Apply. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select True North Orientation. right-click 01 Entry. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 458 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . enter True North Orientation. select True North. and click Rename.

for Dimensions. Click OK. click the Desktop icon. for Compressor. click OK. Click Save. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Orienting to True North | 459 . and click OK. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. For Files of Type. click the Single-Day tab. In the Length/Format dialog. under Format. enter 600 in the first field. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. click Summer Solstice. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. For File Name.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. verify that AVI Files is selected. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. and click OK. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. Los Angeles. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project.

you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. under Settings. for Scheme. select Edit/New.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and exporting it as a JPEG image. For Sun. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. (Show Rendering Dialog). under 3D Views. and 2:00 PM. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. and click OK. click Render. In this exercise. under Quality. and click OK. for Setting. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. capturing it. select 12/22. 2 In the Project Browser. Under Lighting. select Medium. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Date and Time. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 397 for additional information on rendering. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. 3 On the View Control Bar. Since a rendered image is temporary. under 3D Views. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 1 In the Project Browser. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. 460 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select Winter Solstice. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. and click Duplicate. Rendered views do not have this limitation. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. In the Name dialog. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. select Interior: Sun only.

and click Save. and click OK.6 In the Rendering dialog. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. enter living area_winter solstice. Rendering an Interior View | 461 . click Desktop. click Export. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. verify that JPEG Files is selected. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. For Files of type. click Save to Project. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save.

462 .

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 397. When organizing presentation graphics. you can choose between realism and stylistics. In this series of exercises. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. Whether the audience is the general contractor. They include rendering. and details. advanced model graphics. elevations. Using the pre-built building model. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. Co-house. and section boxes. 463 . length. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. Other tools in the software. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. a consultant. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. you explore the stylistic approach. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. however. In this tutorial. an outside reviewer. or the client. For the realistic approach. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. linework. sections. type.

you create a presentation floor plan. you create a copy of the plan. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. To fit the floor plan into the analytique. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation.

right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 465 . Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. right-click 2nd Flr. 3 In the Rename View dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise.rvt. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Cnst. and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. and click OK. Cnst. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened.

expand the Stairs category. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. dimensions. click in the drawing area. and other annotations in this view. sections. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 466. UP Text. and click Save. 7 Under Visibility. and clear DOWN Text. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. and Up Arrow. navigate to the folder of your choice. 11 In the Save As directory. 8 Click OK. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. elevations. This turns off the visibility of all tags. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As.TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. click the Scale control and select 1/8" = 1’ 0". Down Arrow. name the project i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. No annotations display in the view. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. exit the menu. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again.rvt. click the Annotation Categories tab. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. this represents the view getting smaller. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

click the Place tab. modify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and click OK. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. ■ For Contrast. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Boston. click . Using Advanced Model Graphics | 467 . you can create. 2 On the View Control Bar. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. The higher the number. click (Shadows Off). specify 35. 6 Under Settings. select Cast Shadows. 3 On the View Control Bar. Within a project. 9 For City. MA. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. select By Date. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Time and Place. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. the darker the shadows. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. on the Still tab. click . ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. For Sun Position. 7 For Place. At that place. double-click it in the Project Browser.rvt. select Sun and Shadow Settings.

click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify 10/27. 1:00 PM. and click OK. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. and click Advanced Model Graphics. however. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. under Settings. click OK. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. click (Shadows On). 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click OK. Cnst. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and select 1st Flr. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. If you select a different city. for Sun Position. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.NOTE For this step. clear Ground Plane at Level. you can select any city. . 12 Click OK. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. for Date and Time.

4 In the Views dialog. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. TIP If the View tab is not available. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 469. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. and click OK. right-click the Design Bar. and click to place it. click Sheet. select Arch D 36 x 24 Portrait. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 469 .19 Proceed with the next exercise. The viewport displays at the cursor. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Add View. and click View. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click Add View to Sheet.

11 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. click . click Duplicate. and click OK. click Edit/New. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 12 In the Name dialog. The viewport no longer displays a view title. To accomplish this. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For this analytique. and click OK. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. select No. click Modify. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Presentation. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. for Show Title. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 9 On the Options Bar.6 On the Design Bar. and notice the view title. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. under Graphics.

and click Activate View. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. click . 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. 18 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. fill properties. and select Chain. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. When you finish drawing the chain. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. 20 On the Options Bar. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. and the boundary of the region. click Filled Region. If necessary. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines.Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. 17 In the Type Selector. select Invisible lines. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 471 . you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. click .

click Duplicate. enter Solid Black. and click OK. enter Presentation. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. select Solid fill. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. for Sheet Name. 25 In the Name dialog. and click OK. click OK. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. for Fill Pattern. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. under Graphics. and click Deactivate View. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. scroll down. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 472. click Finish Sketch. click . click Edit/New. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Name. and click OK.22 On the Design Bar. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. click Region Properties. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. under Identity Data. and click View Properties. 33 In the Element Properties dialog.

i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 473 . Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click South.rvt.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.

enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. right-click Copy of South. specify 2:30 PM. and click OK. and clear Elevation Swing. enter Presentation South Elevation. under Settings. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click (Shadows Off). Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. under Elevations. click OK. 18 For Time. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. exit the menu. 16 In the Name dialog. and click OK. and click Rename. under Pattern Overrides. click in the drawing area. click . 13 For Contrast. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 11 On the View Control Bar. under Visibility. By changing the angle of the sun. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. on the Model Categories tab. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. and click Advanced Model Graphics. expand the Doors category. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 3 In the Rename View dialog.2 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Cast Shadows. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. specify 35. 9 Click OK. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. Time and Place. under Visibility. select By Date. click Duplicate. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. clear Visible. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. scroll up. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. click in the Walls row. click Override. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 14 For Sun Position. 12 Under Shadow.

double-click A106 . click Add View. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.rvt. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 475.Presentation. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 475 . you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Add View to Sheet. 3 In the Views dialog. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation.

The viewport displays a view title. 5 In the Type Selector. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation. The view title no longer displays.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. click Modify. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 477 . 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 477.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan.

Cnst. under Floor Plans. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. click Section. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 4 Add the section shown below. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and use the flip arrows if necessary. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique.0". i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select 1/8" = 1'.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). double-click 1st Flr.

Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 479 . this view needs to be rotated 180°.0". as shown. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. 7 On the Options Bar. for Scale. and double-click Section 2. select 1/8" = 1'. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. expand Sections (Callout 1). To accomplish this. To fit correctly in the analytique. click Callout.Section 2 is added to the building model. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser.

click Modify. double-click Presentation Section 2. clear Visible. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. and click OK. click Override. under Sections (Callout 1). scroll up. and clear Elevation Swing. and click Rename. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. click the Model Categories tab. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 11 In the Rename View dialog. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. enter Presentation Section 2. 17 Under Visibility. right-click Callout of Section 2. 15 Under Visibility. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 12 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). click in the Walls row. expand the Doors category. under Pattern Overrides.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

click The crop regions no longer display. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 482. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. 20 Click OK. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. When you select the crop region. (Hide Crop Region). Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 481 .■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 22 On the View Control Bar. 24 Proceed with the next exercise.

TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. double-click Presentation Section 2. For Contrast. Click Apply.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. specify 35. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 6 In the Name dialog. click . in the Project Browser. and click OK. specify the following: Under Shadow.rvt. select Cast Shadows. click Duplicate. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. In the steps that follow. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. under Sections (Callout 1). and click Advanced Model Graphics. 3 On the View Control Bar. In addition. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. The shadows do not offer much contrast. ■ For Sun Position.

click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. For Altitude. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 484. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. Silhouette Edges. specify 135°. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 483 . For Azimuth. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. Select Relative to View. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Directly. select Silhouette Edges. click (Shadows On). You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. for Silhouette style. and click Advanced Model Graphics. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. Click OK. and click OK. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. NOTE The line style. was added to this training file for training purposes. specify 70°. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings.

Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click Add View to Sheet. under Sheets (all). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Section: Presentation Section 2. 3 In the Views dialog. click Add View. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click A106 .Presentation. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. and click to place the selected view. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise.

under Sections (Callout 1). 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. 6 On the Design Bar. double-click Section 2. 8 Select the callout that you added previously.5 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Edit toolbar. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. click Modify. The section needs to be rotated 180°. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. To rotate an object. The view title no longer displays. click (Rotate). you click to specify the start radius. In the steps that follow. select Viewport : Presentation. and press Enter. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. Using a clock as a reference. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 485 . Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser.

486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. double-click A106 .Presentation.The callout rotates 180°. under Sheets (all).

15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Working with a Presentation View Template | 487 .14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. and drag it up and to the left as shown. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 487. After applying the view template to a new section view. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise.

rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click OK. 3 In the New View Template dialog. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click Rename. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Type 1). Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. enter Presentation. and click OK. 4 In the View Templates dialog. 7 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Type 1). enter Presentation Section 1. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. right-click Section 1.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you can simply apply the presentation view template. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Section 1. and click OK. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser.

under Sheets (all). 14 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 15 Right-click the viewport. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. for Rotation on Sheet. under Graphics. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. annotations.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Presentation. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. select Section: Presentation Section 1.Presentation. and click Deactivate View. under Names. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and click Activate View. and click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Right-click the viewport. 12 In the Views dialog. double-click A106 . select Viewport : Presentation. The furniture. and elevation swings no longer display. Working with a Presentation View Template | 489 . lighting fixtures. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. select 90° Counterclockwise.

Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. such as a tracery window or a column capital. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . traditional analytiques contain a detail. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 490. In this exercise.

Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. as shown. select the callout. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Type 1). right-click Callout of Section 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. click Callout. 4 In the Project Browser. Working in a Callout Analytique | 491 . i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. After you add the callout. double-click Section 1. click Modify. and click Rename. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown.

clear Crop Region Visible. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. under Extents. enter Presentation Callout. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Project Browser.5 In the Rename View dialog. as shown. double-click Presentation Callout. 7 Select the crop region. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. 8 Right-click. and click View Properties. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. clear Annotation Crop. and click OK.

17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 12 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. select Viewport : Presentation. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. specify 22. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. select Section: Presentation Callout. Click OK.Presentation.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Working in a Callout Analytique | 493 . For Scale Value 1. double-click A106 . 15 On the Design Bar. click Add View. and click Activate View. select Custom. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. 14 In the Type Selector.

The composition set for the analytique is now complete. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. click Filled Region. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. and click Deactivate View. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. When finished. under Sections (Callout 1). 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In the steps that follow. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. activate the viewport. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and move it to the position shown below. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. double-click Presentation Callout. click Edit/New. 23 On the Design Bar.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. click Region Properties. and make adjustments as necessary. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser.

and click Activate View. When you are finished. under Sheets (all). 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Working in a Callout Analytique | 495 . 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. on the Design Bar. click Filled Region.Presentation. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. and click OK 3 times. for Fill Pattern. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. click Finish Sketch. 28 In the Project Browser. select Solid fill. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.25 In the Type Properties dialog. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. click . double-click A106 . You do not have to replicate the image exactly. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once.

32 On the Design Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below. click . and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. click Finish Sketch. click (Show Crop Region). 34 Select the crop region.31 On the Options Bar. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 33 On the View Control Bar. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 497. click (Hide Crop Region). and click Deactivate View. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson.35 On the View Control Bar. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 497 . 37 Click File menu ➤ Save.

rvt. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click (Shadows Off). 3 On the View Control Bar. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Isometric.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. and apply shadows to the views. click the Scale control. 5 On the View Control Bar. and click 1" = 20'-0". You then add each view to the presentation sheet. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under 3D Views. and click Advanced Model Graphics.

select Silhouette Edges.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 135°. 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 13 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 1. and click OK. in the list. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under 3D Views. and click OK. A section box displays around the building model. select Section Box. double-click Isometric 2. and click OK. 15 In the Rename View dialog. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. For Sun Position. under 3D Views. select Directly. for Silhouette style. click . Cnst. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. enter Isometric 2. and click OK. and click OK. Select 1st Flr. 8 In the Name dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 499 . For Contrast. Select Relative to View. specify 45°. under Extents. Select Ground Plane at Level. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Rename. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. specify 35. For Altitude. under 3D Views. select Cast Shadows. Click OK. and click Rename. click Duplicate. under 3D Views. 14 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. For Azimuth. right-click Isometric. right-click Isometric 1. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

You can use this to rotate the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar.19 Select the section box. as shown. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. Grips display on each face of the section box. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. When you are finished.

The section box no longer displays. On the Annotation Categories tab. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. clear Section Boxes. 29 To hide the section box. right-click Isometric 2. the stairs and railings may display. enter Isometric 3. make a copy of the view. On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 501 . 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. double-click Isometric 3. and click OK.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. under 3D Views. 25 To hide the section box. When you are finished. 24 In the Project Browser. If desired. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. 27 Select the section box. and click Rename. clear Section Boxes. you can adjust the plane location. double-click Isometric 2. and click OK. 21 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Rename View dialog. 22 In the Project Browser. click Modify on the Design Bar. under 3D Views.

drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. The filled region partially covers the view. select Viewport : Presentation. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation. 32 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. double-click A106 . under 3D Views. In the Type Selector.Presentation. 31 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. under 3D Views. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. under Sheets (all).Next. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. select Viewport : Presentation. 33 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector.

Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 503 . and click Activate View. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. select Concrete.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. The image below shows the redrawn lines. This will make it easier to draw lines. for Fill Patterns. 35 Select the poche filled region. click Edit. click Region Properties. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. select Transparent. 41 On the Design Bar. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. On the Options Bar. click Lines. 39 For Background. 36 On the Design Bar. 42 Using the drawing tools. click Edit/New. 40 Click OK twice.

46 Click OK twice. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Solid fill. click Region Properties. for Fill Pattern. and click Deactivate View. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 47 On the Design Bar. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 505. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. click Edit/New.43 On the Design Bar. 44 In the Element Properties dialog.

and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. you create the final view for the analytique. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 505 . Cnst. click Camera. The view opens immediately. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. then you specify the eye direction and range. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. a cutaway perspective view. double-click 1st Flr. you add it to the presentation sheet. under Floor Plans.

select Silhouette Edges. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 35. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and click Advanced Model Graphics. For Sun Position. click . specify the following: Under Shadow. select Cast Shadows.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. 6 On the View Control Bar. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Name. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. For Contrast. 506 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. for Silhouette style.

11 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 507 . You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. under Extents. and click OK. Grips display on each plane of the section box. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. A section box now cuts through the building model. select Section Box. 12 Select the section box.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. enter 6 1/2". 18 On the View Control Bar. 17 Under Model Crop Size. 508 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 15 On the Options Bar. click Size. under Change. and click OK. 21 In the Project Browser. for Width. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet.14 Select the crop region. you must specify the actual size of the image. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. select Viewport : Presentation. click (Hide Crop Region). double-click A106 . In the Type Selector. under Sheets (all). 19 To hide the section box. select Scale (locked proportions). under 3D Views. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Presentation. and click OK. clear Section Boxes. On the Annotation Categories tab.

7 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Edit/New. 3 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click OK. enter Description. select a font. select the same font as the title. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. specify a text size of 1/4". under Text. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. and click OK. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A106 . click . 6 In the Name dialog.rvt. Annotating the Analytique on page 509.Presentation sheet is not the active view. 10 In the Name dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. specify a text size of 1 1/2". Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. enter Title. click Edit/New. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click it in the Project Browser. under Text. Annotating the Analytique | 509 . click Text. select Text : Title. and click OK. 5 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Modify. 16 In the Type Selector. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. select Text : Description. 18 On the Design Bar. 510 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Importing and Exporting 511 .

512 .

such as walls. curtain walls. After you import the SketchUp model. that compose the building. 513 .Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. you create a small building from the front mass form. Once the model has been imported. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. and roofs. you can easily add detail with Revit components. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. In this tutorial.

skp. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. ■ 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. For Layers. select Auto-Detect.rte. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Colors. For Files of type. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. select SketchUp Files. or select from a list. visible elements. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. buildings. for File name. Click the Sketchup file. 9 In the informational dialog. click OK. select All. click Training Files. 6 In the Save As dialog. Double-click the Common folder. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. 10 In the Name dialog. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 4 In the New Project dialog. and click Save. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under Template file. and not in the library. enter Import SketchUp. click the Massing tab. and click OK. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Create Mass. enter SketchUp Model. click Browse. For Import units. right-click in the Design Bar. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. and open Imperial\Templates\default. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. you create a Revit Architecture project. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. select Preserve.

click . click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 515 . 14 On the View toolbar. 17 In the warning dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. and roofs. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. Click Open. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. For Place at level. depending on the complexity of the project. select Level 1. such as walls. ■ ■ For Positioning. Level 1 is the only choice.Center. click the Close button. curtain walls. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. select Manual .You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. In a new project.

After you create the building from the mass faces. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. click Roof by Face. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. and roofs. select the face so that it highlights in red. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. for Level. 3 In the Type Selector. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. such as walls. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. verify Level 2 is selected. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 516. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.18 Proceed to the next exercise. verify Basic Roof: Generic . curtain walls. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. You turn their visibility off to view only the building.12'' displays. that compose the building. 4 On the Options Bar. and on the View Control Bar.

This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. click Create Roof. on the View toolbar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 9 On the Options Bar. click Create Roof. A roof is created from the mass face. click to display masses. 6 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. To see the new roof. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. on the Options Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.

click Roof by Face. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. click Create Roof. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 12 On the Design Bar.

20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 23 On the Options Bar. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. to turn off the mass visibility in the view.15 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. 22 In the Type Selector. for Loc Line.8'' displays. 16 On the View toolbar. verify Basic Wall: Generic . and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. click roofs that you created. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . click Modify to end the command. 21 On the Design Bar. select Core Face: Exterior. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form.

24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 25 On the View toolbar. click Curtain System by Face. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. 28 In the Type Selector. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. click to view only the walls and roofs. verify Curtain System: 5' x 10' displays.

click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 32 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 . Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 31 Using the same technique.30 On the Options Bar. click Create System. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. create the 2 curtain systems shown below.

38 Select the mass face shown below. and on the Options Bar.35 On the Design Bar. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. click Create Roof. click Create System. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. and select it. click Wall by Face. click Curtain System. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. select the other wall. and on the Options Bar. 522 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Roof by Face.

45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. Below the right corner of the view. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 523 . 43 Click to redisplay the masses.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. click Camera. specify a point to place the camera. 42 On the View toolbar. click Wall by Face. double-click Level 1. and select the mass face shown below. click to view the building that you have created.

48 On the View toolbar. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. specify a point for the camera target.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. Click the frame to display its grips. 524 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . as shown. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. The perspective view created by the camera displays. click your building in the view. roofs. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. to view only the walls.

click Modify.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. Click OK. click . 50 On the Options Bar. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. select Center. Under Grid 1 Pattern. and select the left curtain system in the view. Under Grid 2 Pattern. for Justification. for Justification. select Center. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 525 .

and click Cancel to end the command. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 526 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . double-click {3D}. and move the roof edges as shown below. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 59 On the View toolbar. click Door. under 3D Views. double-click 3D View 1. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. under 3D Views. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. verify Single-Flush: 36'' x 84'' displays. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.54 Select each roof to display its grips. 56 In the Project Browser. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 63 In the Type Selector. 55 Right-click.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 527 . 65 Save and close the drawing.64 Add doors to the building as shown below.

528 .

Using Advanced Features 529 .

530 .

and mullions. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. panel. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. to resize the system. you create a curtain system using the wall command. This affects the entire curtain system. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. you need to select a panel. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. To switch panel types. grid lines. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. For example. and they are not windows. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. To change grids. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. Like walls. 531 . and you can change these elements individually. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. Like windows.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. or you can use a specific curtain system command. Unlike windows. you select the grid. you need to change the length of the wall.

6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. click Wall.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown.rvt. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. and open Imperial\i_Curtain_Walls. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Ground Floor. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.

and double-click Southeast Isometric. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating an Entrance | 533 . expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.

For Top Offset. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. and click (Properties). using curtain grids. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. Click OK. top and base attachments. and room bounding. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. top constraint.11 Select the curtain system. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. enter 4'0".

and click OK. click Curtain Grid. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 23 Place another grid 5'0" above the first grid. 20 In the drawing area. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. click Elevation. Creating an Entrance | 535 .a. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 4'0" above the ground floor level line. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. right-click Elevation 1 . 18 In the Project Browser. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. and click Rename. under Floor Plans.

25 On the Design Bar. Click to create a vertical grid. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. THIRD FLOOR. FIFTH FLOOR. and SEVENTH FLOOR. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. SIXTH FLOOR. FOURTH FLOOR.24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. one larger than the other. 26 While pressing CTRL. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Modify. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. click Curtain Grid. while pressing CTRL. and click OK. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select SECOND FLOOR. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels.

33 On the Design Bar. click Modify.32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. you add a doorway to the curtain system. and then select the segment above it. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. Click to place another grid line. The segment line style changes to dashed. click Add or Remove Segments. Next. and on the Options Bar. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. Creating an Entrance | 537 . Instead of using the Door command. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them.

538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . select One Segment. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 38 Using the same method. and lock them. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 On the Design Bar.The two segments are removed. click Curtain Grid. 42 Place dimensions as shown.

You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. Creating an Entrance | 539 . 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 4'0" above the ground floor. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. Do not click between the 6-foot panels. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. click in any white space to exit the editor. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). You now have two 6-foot wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. Use the following image as a guide. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. 43 Delete the dimensions. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained.

They are part of the curtain panel category. 52 On the Type Selector. 54 On the Design Bar. 55 In the Project Browser. not as curtain panels. under Elevations. on the new curtain system you added. 57 On the View Control Bar. 56 In the Project Browser. . and click Wireframe. 51 Select the left 6-foot panel. click Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. Now. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. double-click Entrance Elevation.rfa. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and open Imperial\Families\Doors\Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. click view. under Floor Plans. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. The panel changes to a double door. This changes the graphics style of the Next. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors.Next. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Training Files. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. These panels schedule as doors. click Modify. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you replace the 2 larger 6-foot panels with curtain system doors.

and the solid panels display in white. 65 On the View Control Bar. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. click . 61 With the panel still selected. The glazed panels display in blue. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. click System Panel : Solid. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall.60 On the Type Selector. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. Creating an Entrance | 541 . 63 Click OK twice. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe.

click Mullion. click Save As. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. there are a few that you do not want. Name the file i_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. so you remove them next. because their width reduces the size of the doors. 6 On the Options Bar. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 10 Delete the mullions below them. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 4'0" above the ground floor.rvt. select Entire Grid Line. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. select Grid Line Segment. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. clickModify. however. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . select All Empty Segments.68 On the File menu. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. 2 On the Options Bar.

Two mullion join controls display. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 543 . You are going to change some mullion joins. 14 Click the top mullion control. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors.

you add a curtain system using the wall command. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. 17 Save the file. under Floor Plans. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. 15 On the Design Bar. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. click Wall.The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. 4 In the Type Selector. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. click Modify. you can also right-click. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. Finally. Finally. 16 In the Project Browser. 5 Click . 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Southeast Isometric. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise.

6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. (Arc passing through three points). specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. for Top Constraint. Click OK. 10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. enter 4'0". Adding a Curved Curtain System | 545 . 7 On the Options Bar. For Top Offset.

The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. 14 In the Project Browser. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Next. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and then sixteenths. you place grids on the system. Divide the halves into quarters.The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. eighths. You are going to use one of these snaps points. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. 15 Zoom in to the cylinder. double-click East. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. under Elevations. click Curtain Grid. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

16 On the Design Bar. you change some panels in the system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. Next. to filter out all 19 Save the file. select Basic Wall: Generic . click Modify. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box.12" . you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 547 . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. 18 In the Type Selector. select the bottom layer of panels.

1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\Curtain Wall Panel.rft. 3 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior. 4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines, and on the Options Bar, for Depth, enter 4". 6 On the Options Bar, click .

7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection.

8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 9 Select the extrusion, and click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog, for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory, select Glass, and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar, click Model Lines. 12 On the Options Bar, clear Chain, and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. .

548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

14 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the family as Curtain Panel - Pattern.rfa. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close, and return to the project file. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 18 Load the Curtain Panel - Pattern.rfa family. 19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted, right-click, and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. All fourth floor panels are selected. 21 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Panel - Pattern. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 23 Right-click, and click Change Walls Orientation. 24 On the View toolbar, click 25 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).

26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building.

27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click FIFTH FLOOR. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc, right-click, and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. All fifth floor panels are selected. 29 In the Type Selector, select System Panel - Solid. All the panels change to the solid panel.

Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 549

The finished arc wall should look like the following image.

30 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel.

Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel
In this exercise, you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click East. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel, except at the GROUND FLOOR level.

For vertical mullions, you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion.

550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\Profile.rft. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog, for Profile Usage, select Mullion, and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 9 On the Options Bar:

Click

(Polygon). , and select it.

If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar, click
■ ■

For Sides, enter 8. Select Radius, and enter 2" for the radius.

10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. Click again to specify the ending point. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location.

11 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 13 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog, clear Fine, and click OK. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Cylinder Mullion - detail.rfa. 17 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown.

Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 551

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Select the detail component, and click Visibility. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog, clear Coarse and Medium, and click OK. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion.rfa. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close, and return to the project file. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion.rfa family. After the new profile is loaded, it can be added as a mullion type. 27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 28 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels).

29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 31 Click .

32 In the Element Properties dialog, select Circular Mullion for Family. 33 Click Edit/New. 34 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name, and click OK. 36 Under Construction, for Profile, select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 37 Click OK twice. 38 On the Options Bar, select All Empty Segments. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 40 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

You have placed more mullions than you want, so you remove the unwanted ones. 41 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc, right-click, and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 43 Press DELETE.

44 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding mullions, as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. In this lesson, you learned to create a curved curtain system, make custom curtain panels and mullions, and then apply those custom elements to the system.

Additional Curtain Systems
In this lesson, you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system, a storefront system, and a ruled curtain system.

Additional Curtain Systems | 553

Sloped Glazings
Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click TOP OF ROOF. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E.

3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 5 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. TIP To chain select all the walls, place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls, and press TAB. All the inside faces highlight, and you can click to select them all.

7 On the Design Bar, click Roof Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Family, select System Family: Sloped Glazing. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level, enter 2' 0". Click OK.

554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof. 10 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 11 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Zoom in to the skylight.

13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 14 On the Options Bar, select Entire Grid Line. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

18 Save the file. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system.

Storefront System
In this exercise, you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model.

Storefront System | 555

You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 5 On the Options Bar, select Unconnected for Height, and enter 8' 0". 6 Start the wall 4' 0" from one end of the wall on the wall centerline.

7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown.

556 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

The curtain wall cuts the original wall.

8 Click the temporary dimension, enter 34' 0", and press ENTER. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 9 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 10 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall.

The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout, which is specified in the type. To see how the grid layout is defined, you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. 12 Select the storefront wall, and click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. For this wall, the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing, and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 5' 0". This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 5’ 0". The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance, and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 8'0". This means that the panel heights will be exactly 8', even if the wall height changes. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters, click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading, you find Number, Justification, Angle, and Offset. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. Under Vertical Grid Pattern, the Number

Storefront System | 557

is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning, center, or end. By setting the Angle value, you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. For more information about these curtain wall parameters, see the Revit Architecture help. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall, for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle, enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle, enter 15. 16 Click OK.

17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 18 On the Options Bar, select All Empty Segments. 19 Select a curtain grid.

20 Save the file. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. In this exercise, you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout.

Curtain System by Lines
In this exercise, you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise.

558 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab, making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight.

6 Click the highlighted line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level, and highlight the model line.

Curtain System by Lines | 559

8 Select the highlighted line. A panel between the 2 lines is created. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall.

9 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 10 Select the panel, and click .

Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 11 Click OK. Next, you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system, but now that you have created a ruled curtain system, you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain Grid.

560 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps, place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves, quarters, and then eighths. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves, quarters, and then eighths. Finally, you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel, right-click, and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. 16 In the Type Selector, select System Panel : Solid. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid.

18 Save the file. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system, and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system, embed a curtain system inside another wall, and define a ruled curtain system.

Curtain System by Lines | 561

562

Roofs

15
In this lesson, you learn to create several different types of roofs, including hip, gable, shed, mansard, and low sloped roofs. In this lesson, you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. In this exercise, you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage.

In this tutorial, you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. In addition, you learn how to add fascia, gutters, and soffits to the roofs that you create.

Creating Roofs

Creating an Extruded Roof

You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Before you can sketch the roof profile, you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. You do not need to create the work plane; a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.

Training File

Click File menu ➤ Open.

563

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Roofs.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 3 In the Work Plane dialog, select Name, and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 4 Click OK. 5 In the Go To View dialog, verify that Section: Section1 is selected, and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog, verify Level 3 is selected for Level, and click OK. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof.

Before you can sketch the profile of the roof, you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 1'6'' to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face.

564 | Chapter 15 Roofs

you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 1'6" to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. centerline.TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. click the blue square on the witness line. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 1'6" below Level 2. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. Creating an Extruded Roof | 565 . To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. and so on).

click Lines. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof profile. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. select Chain.Next. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 13 On the Options Bar. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 16 On the View toolbar. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction.

click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. The roof should resemble the following illustration. Next. 17 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify. and double-click Section 1. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. press TAB. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. 19 On the Tools toolbar.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. and select the second wall. 21 In the Project Browser. and then select the exterior face of the wall. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. Creating an Extruded Roof | 567 . press CTRL. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. expand Sections (Type 1). 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 18 Select the edge of the roof. expand Views (all). click (Join/Unjoin Roof).

Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click model. click Attach for Top/Base.24 On the Options Bar. 26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 568.

click Pick Walls. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. the roof is automatically created on the lowest level of the house and a notification dialog is displayed. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 569 . Next. expand Floor Plans. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and double-click Garage Roof. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 On the Options Bar.rvt. i_Roofs. 3 In the Project Browser. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Yes. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. Because you are in a three-dimensional view. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. verify that Defines slope is selected. expand Views (all). 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof footprint. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level.

click (Properties). clear Defines slope. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. enter 6'' for Rise/12" to change the roof slope. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. click the model. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 14 When you see the informational dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Press CTRL. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 571. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. the roof slope has a 9'' rise over a 12'' run. 8 On the Options Bar. under Dimensions. click Modify. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Finish Roof. By default. select both slope definition lines. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 15 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line.

press TAB. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. sketch the chimney opening. clear Defines slope. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Pick Walls. 1 In the Project Browser. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. and double-click Level 3. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. 6 Click to select all the walls. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 571 . NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. When you complete the roof.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. i_Roofs. Next. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls.rvt. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls.

sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. select Defines Slope. click Finish Roof. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 13 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). click Lines. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 When you see the informational dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 10 On the View menu. 18 On the View toolbar. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 9 Using automatic snaps.7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. add new slope lines to the roof. select Defines Slope. 8 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. Next. 15 On the Options bar.

and double-click Level 2. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 573 . and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 573. clear Defines Slope. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. Next.19 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. close the roof sketch. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all).rvt. click Pick Walls. and click (Pick Lines). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. i_Roofs. click Lines. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 7 On the Options Bar. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. select Defines slope.

and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. click (Trim/Extend). 10 On the Options Bar. using the following illustration for guidance. click Finish Roof. 11 To trim the first line segment. enter 2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep.8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 9 On the Tools toolbar. raise the roof 2' above the current level. click Roof Properties. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. select the left vertical slope definition line. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. Next. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. and click OK. Next. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 14 Under Constraints. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 18 On the Design Bar. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 17 On the View toolbar. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. click Modify. join the two remaining walls to the roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 575 . and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. click (SteeringWheels). 22 Using the same method that you used previously.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 21 Click (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house.16 On the View toolbar.

The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 23 On the Tools toolbar.Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 576. Next. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof.rvt. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. i_Roofs. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.

Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. Next. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep.1 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Options Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. select the left vertical roof line. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. click (Trim/Extend). 8 On the Tools toolbar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 To trim the first line segment. 6 On the Options Bar. Next. press TAB. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. expand Views (all). 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. and double-click Level 2. enter 0' 0'' for Overhang. you add a slope-defining line. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 577 . 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. clear Defines Slope. click Pick Walls. 4 On the Options Bar.

click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. and double-click Level 2. enter -2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. and click OK. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. and press ENTER. you add slope arrows to the shed roof.12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and double-click 3D. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. expand 3D Views. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 578. i_Roofs. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. click Modify. 3 On the Options Bar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. click 20 On the View toolbar. 14 Enter 6" for the rise value to change the roof slope. expand Views (all). click Finish Roof to complete the roof. (SteeringWheels). expand Floor Plans. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 13 On the Options Bar. 19 On the View toolbar.rvt. click Roof Properties. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. 16 Under Constraints. select Defines slope.

To help locate the position of each split. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. add two new slope arrows. click Ref Plane. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Slope Arrow. Before you can add slope arrows. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 14 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Tools menu. and enter 2' 0'' for Offset. clear Defines Slope. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. Next. Next. click Split Walls and Lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . click (Pick Lines). click Modify. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 12 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. you need to add two reference planes.15 to add the second slope arrow. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 579 . Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. verify ■ (Draw) is selected.5 On the View menu. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint.

you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). and click OK. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. select both slope arrows. and double-click Garage Roof. When you sketch a hip roof. (Properties). and click 19 Under Constraints. enter 6'' for Rise/12". When eave heights differ. and move the cursor to place the arrow. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The eave lines display with a dimension. 18 Press CTRL. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 20 Under Dimensions. select Slope for Specify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Floor Plans. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. and then click OK. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. enter 12'' for Rise/12". NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 5 On the Options Bar.Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. on the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 580. the adjacent eave heights must align. (Properties). This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). select Defines Slope. under Dimensions. click Edit. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. click Align Eaves. When aligning eaves. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify.rvt. i_Roofs.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Mansard_Roof. click Save As. click Training Files.rvt. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating a Mansard Roof | 581 . 13 On the View toolbar. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 12 On the Design Bar. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. select a method to align the eaves. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 581.Next. 14 If you want to save your changes. 10 On the Options Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Finish Roof. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. on the File menu.

expand Views (all). (Properties). under Constraints. Next. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. 7 In the Project Browser. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Modify. and double-click North. 6 On the View toolbar. expand Floor Plans. 3 Select the roof and.1 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 4 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Views (all). click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. and double-click Level 3. expand Elevations.

enter 3'' for Rise/12". click mansard roof. press TAB. and click OK. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.10 On the Options Bar. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 584. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then select Defines slope. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. and select the remaining three lines. on the File menu. Creating a Mansard Roof | 583 . under Dimensions. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. click Modify. click . 14 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click (Pick Lines). 17 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof.

you add a roof to a building shell. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. After you add the roof. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. under Floor Plans.rvt. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. click Pick Walls.Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. 3 On the Design Bar. double-click Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.

4 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Tools toolbar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . Because the walls are not continuous. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 5 In the drawing area. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. verify that Defines slope is not selected. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. click (Trim/Extend). 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry.

double-click the section head to open the section view. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. select Steel Truss . click Roof Properties. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. and click OK. for Type.Insulation on Metal Deck .EPDM.8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Open a section view 12 In the drawing area.

16 On the Options Bar. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. and click to select it. double-click Roof. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line Creating a Low Slope Roof | 587 . but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage.The roof has been created. In the next steps. 18 Move the cursor down. under Floor Plans. click (Draw Split Lines). 17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line.

(Add points). add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. move the cursor horizontally to the left. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. The roof is now divided into 6 sections. 20 Using the same method.You create a split line vertically down the center. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Next. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. and select a point on the opposite roof line. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. on the Options Bar. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges.

Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab.In this exercise. You modify the points individually. 25 Using the same method. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. for the dimension. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 589 . click (Modify Sub-Elements). exact placement of the points is not important. enter -2''. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. 23 On the Options Bar. 24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. and press ENTER.

Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. click (Modify Sub-Elements).The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. for Elevation. click Modify. including the interior edges of the roof regions. enter 4''. and press ENTER. 27 Press and hold CTRL. 29 On the Design Bar. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and select all of the roof edges. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar.

36 View the results in the section view. for Structure. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. for the Thermal/Air Layer. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Properties). By making the insulation layer variable. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. The entire slab is sloped. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 591 . Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. click Edit/New. under Construction.Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. 31 Select the roof slab. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. In some cases this type of slope is desired. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. click Edit. select Variable. The slab has not responded exactly as intended. 35 Click OK 3 times. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. and on the Options Bar. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.

and Soffits on page 592. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Soffits In this lesson.The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. on the File menu. 3 Press CTRL. Creating Fascia. Creating Fascia. Gutters.rfa and Gutter Profile-Cove. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. select Fascia-Built-Up. and click Open. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise.rvt. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. gutters. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rfa. you can easily create its fascia. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. and soffits. and soffits in Revit Architecture. click Training Files. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Gutters. you learn how to create roof fascia. gutters. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and open Imperial\Families\Profiles\Roofs. After you create a roof. click Save As. and open Common\c_Condominium. click (Properties). 37 If you want to save your changes. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

select Fascia-Built-Up: 1 x 12 w 1 x 8 for Profile. under Construction. enter Built-up Fascia. Creating Roof Fascia | 593 . 9 In the Type Properties dialog.7 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. click Duplicate. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. Creating Gutters on page 594. 13 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Name dialog. and click OK twice. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. and click OK. click Modify to exit the Fascia command.

select Gutter-Bevel: 5'' x 5'' for Profile. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 On the Options Bar. click in the Value field for Material. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. click Edit/New. 3 In the Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 594 | Chapter 15 Roofs .Creating Gutters In this exercise.rvt. c_Condominium. click Duplicate. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. under Construction. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. click (Properties). you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 10 Click to place the gutter. . and click OK three times. and click OK.

Creating Soffits on page 595. you learn how to place a roof soffit. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. click Pick Roofs. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. c_Condominium. Creating Soffits | 595 . and double-click Roof. 3 On the Design Bar.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. expand Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Creating Soffits In this exercise.

click Join Geometry. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Tools menu. and double-click 3D. expand Views (all).4 Select the roof. 596 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and then select the soffit to join them. 5 On the Design Bar. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. click Finish Sketch. expand 3D Views. 8 Select the roof.

Creating Soffits | 597 .9 If you want to save your changes. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

598 .

Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 599 .rvt. If you are using metric units. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. In the final exercise. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. View predefined area schemes 1 In the Project Browser. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. right-click in the Design Bar. your values will be different. and open Common\c_Area. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. click Settings. click Training Files. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. and click Room and Area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. click the Area Schemes tab. Finally. 3 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. 2 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible.

Create a gross building area plan 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. 4 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to 4 feet or above the level. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. or 0. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. 7 In the New Area Plan dialog. click Area Plan. 5 Click Cancel. These schemes define spatial relationships. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. it is not necessary in this exercise. the system-computed height defaults to the level. click the Room Calculations tab. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected.There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Click OK.

you must manually add these boundary lines. If you select No. 11 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. 9 In the Project Browser. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Click OK. and store area. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. under Views (all). To modify the area. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. rather than the area tag. you must select one of the reference lines. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). you create a new area plan for rentable space. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. forming a closed loop. When you select Yes in this dialog. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. 13 In the New Area Plan dialog.8 When the informational dialog displays. click Area Plan. click Area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 601 . common areas. Next.

When you pick the walls. If you do not select this option.14 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. When you add area boundary lines. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. 15 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. 20 In the upper left corner of the building model. Add area boundary lines 16 On the Design Bar. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. 17 On the Options Bar. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. 19 On the Design Bar. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. click Area Boundary. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. click Area. you can either draw them or pick them. 18 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time.

24 In the Element Properties dialog. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. click ■ ■ ■ . do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. Click OK.21 On the Design Bar. 26 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. click Modify and select the area. and click to select the area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 603 . click Modify. 23 On the Options Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. 22 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. click Area. 27 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar.

and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. Click OK. Select Office area for Area Type. Click OK. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ ■ ■ . 30 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. enter Core for Name. 32 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. and select Store Area for Area Type. and Tenant 4 in the lower right.28 On the Options Bar. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. 604 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 31 Add an area to the building model core.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. In this exercise. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 605 .Notice that within the two store areas. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. and click to place the legend. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. 34 Navigate to your preferred directory. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. name the project Area-in progress. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. click Save. 33 On the File menu.rvt. and click Save. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Color Scheme Legend. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. In the next exercise.

3 When the dialog displays. under Category. click the Fields tab. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. 7 Under Available fields. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. select Area Type and click Add. select Areas (Rentable). 606 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . and click OK.

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 607 . The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK.

608 .

and roofs. roofs. you can specify the view to display massing elements. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. After creating mass floors. You assign the default wall. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. In this tutorial. floor. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. curtain systems. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. building elements. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. you then need to update the building face. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. If you modify a massing face. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. At any time. or both. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. 609 . you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. volume. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. and perimeter information. and floors. After you make building elements. floors. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise.

The Design Bar title changes to Mass. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. and cutting geometry. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. under Views (all).Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. double-click Level 1. click Create Mass. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Training Files. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. sweeps. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click Massing. and open Imperial\i_Massing_Start. 5 On the Design Bar. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar.

8 On the Design Bar. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. enter 5'0". Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. and click . click (Default 3D View). under Materials and Finishes. 15 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 10 In the Materials dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. (Pick Lines). Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 611 . enter 80'0". This means the sketch line is placed 5 feet from the position you pick with the cursor. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. and on the Options Bar. 13 On the View toolbar. for Extrusion End. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. under Views (all). click Extrusion Properties. 12 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. click 18 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. click Lines. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. 16 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click the value for Material. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Offset. for Name. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. (Line). select Mass (Opaque).

28 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Transparent). highlight the larger form. 21 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 26 In the Project Browser. The second form is on top of the first form. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . enter 90'0". under Constraints. select Pick a plane. and click OK. click the value for Material. under Views (all). and click . double-click West. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. under Materials and Finishes. for Extrusion Start.20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. click Extrusion Properties. click Finish Sketch. 30 In the drawing area. and click OK. double-click {3D} to see the results. under Views (all). for Name. 25 On the Design Bar. for Extrusion End. and click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Materials dialog. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 80'0". Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 29 In the Work Plane dialog.

press TAB to highlight the entire face. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. and clear Chain. click (Draw). 31 Click to select the face. click Lines. and on the Options Bar. (Pick Lines). you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 613 . The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. Next. 34 On the Options Bar. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown.TIP If necessary. and click to select the line start point.

614 | Chapter 17 Massing . and delete the vertical construction line. TIP If you do not see this option. click Modify. 39 On the Design Bar. click (Move). and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. click (Arc passing through three points). 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line.36 Sketch a line 19 feet up as shown. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. 41 On the Edit toolbar. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 37 On the Options Bar. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown.

46 On the Design Bar. 53 On the View toolbar. double-click East. and click OK. (Line). click 49 Create an arc as shown. 50 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 48 On the Options Bar.Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. under Views (all). (Arc passing through three points). for Material. and that -300'0" is specified for Second End. click Lines and. click Edit Top. click Blend Properties. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. 45 In the Project Browser. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 615 . 52 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View).

select the mass. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. under Floor Plans. click Ref Plane. 2 In the drawing area. In this exercise.54 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. In the next exercise. double-click Level 1. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 616. i_Massing_Start. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise.rvt. under Views (all). Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.

as shown. click Lines. for Extrusion End. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 Click OK. When sketching each extrusion. NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. click Finish Sketch. click (Pick Lines) and enter 50' for Offset. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. enter 40'0" and for Extrusion Start. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. click Extrusion Properties. and select Chain. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. snap the corners to the intersections. 7 Using the same technique. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. on the View Control Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. enter 0. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 617 . 6 Place another reference plane 50' to the right of the first reference plane. 14 Under Constraints. click (Line). When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. click (Default 3D View). place 3 more reference planes 50' apart from left to right.4 On the Options bar. and place the first reference plane 50' to the right.

and click Lines. 4 On the Options Bar. click Sketch 2D Path. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise.In this exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass.rvt. i_Massing_Start. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Design Bar.

Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. ■ For the radius. 6 On the Design Bar.■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. Using Swept Blends | 619 . select a point below the mass elements. The only way to align these elements is visually. click Finish Path.

click Finish Profile. click Lines. 15 On the Design Bar. and sketch a 20' x 20' rectangle on the face of the mass. click (Default 3D View). 9 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). click (Align). 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. 8 On the Design Bar. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Profile 2. and press ESC. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. and click Edit.Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. click Profile 1. as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar.

22 Click OK twice. and click . and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. 21 In the Materials dialog. 23 On the Design Bar. Using Swept Blends | 621 . under Materials and Finishes.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. select Mass (Transparent). Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. click Finish Profile. click Swept Blend Properties. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. click Finish Swept Blend.17 Using the same method. click <By Category>. as shown: ■ ■ 18 On the Design Bar.

Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. Finally. In this exercise. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. you create new family types from a mass family file. You place several instances of the mass families into the project.rvt. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. click Finish Mass.24 On the Design Bar. 26 Save the file as i_Massing_Complete.

for Height.rfa. enter 60'0". and open Imperial\Families\Massing\Box. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. enter 225' x 30' x 60'. and click OK. click Family Types. enter 35'0". and for Name. enter 50'0". enter 30'0". 8 For Width.rfa. 2 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. and for Name. 5 Click New. 3 In the Name dialog. enter 15'0". Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. Creating New Mass Family Types | 623 . under Other. enter 60'0". enter 150' x 15' x 35'. and click Apply. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. 6 For Width. enter 40'0". for Depth. for Height. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 150'0". for Height. enter 50' x 60' x 40'. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 Click OK. 7 Click New. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. for Depth. click New. and click OK. for Width. In this exercise. for Depth. enter 225'0". and click Apply.

9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 1 If not already selected. select Box-Training: 225' x 30' x 60'.rfa family files. click Training Files. You also load other existing mass families and place them.rfa. and open the Imperial\Families\Massing folder. as shown. Semi Barrel Vault. and open Imperial\i_Massing_In-place. double-click Site. In the left pane of the Open dialog. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. Arc Dome. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 8 In the Type Selector. 3 On the View Control Bar. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. and Triangle.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. click Place Mass. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.rfa. under Views (all).rvt.rfa. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. on the View toolbar. 6 Open the Box-Training. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing .

25 In the drawing area. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 625 . select Rotate after placement. click Modify. 11 Select the box. 14 In the Type Selector. specify Mass (Opaque). enter 90 for Angle. as shown. select Triangle: 50' x 150' x 35'. 23 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material parameter. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select Box-Training: 50' x 60' x 40'.10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. click (Element Properties). and click OK twice. 16 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select the triangle. 17 Press CTRL. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. and click to place the mass. click Place Mass. click Modify. and click OK twice. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. click Place Mass. for the Material parameter. and click (Element Properties). and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. and on the Options Bar. select the 3 boxes. 20 In the Type Selector. specify Mass (Transparent).

28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click Place Mass. and click OK twice. click (Default 3D View). for the Material parameter. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. select Box-Training: 150' x 15' x 35'. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Mass (Opaque). for the Material parameter. specify Mass (Transparent). 29 In the Type Selector. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). 33 On the View toolbar. and click (Element Properties). 626 | Chapter 17 Massing .26 Select the triangle. 30 Place the box mass family as shown.

you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. In this exercise. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. Joining Mass Elements | 627 . (Join Geometry). NOTE When you join geometry. click (Default 3D View).Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. Training File ■ Continue using the i_Massing_In-place. In the next exercise. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. you join these mass elements.rvt file. click 2 On the Tools toolbar.

on the Edit toolbar. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 150' x 15' x 35' and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 50' x 60' x 40' as shown. 4 Select the triangle. under Views (all). Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing .3 Select the middle Box-Training: 50' x 60' x 40' mass element as shown. click (Mirror).

enter SM. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 150' x 15' x 35' first. 17 Press ESC to see the result. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. click 14 On the Tools toolbar.8 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View). and then select the triangle. as shown. (Join Geometry). click (Draw). for Axis. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. Joining Mass Elements | 629 .

2 On the Window menu.In this exercise. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . do not clear the check mark. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. and select the triangle mass element. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson.rvt. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. click Modify. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. click (Add to Design Option Set). Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_In-place. (If Design Options is already selected. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. you joined mass elements together. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. 1 On the Design Bar.

17 In the Type Selector.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. select Sloped (primary). 13 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. for Angle. for the Material parameter. click Place Mass. select Rotate after placement. and click OK twice. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. select Arc Dome: 20'R x 9'H. 10 On the Options Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Place Mass. click Modify. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. and click (Element Properties). select the 2 semi barrel vaults. clear Curved. select Semi Barrel Vault: 35' x 50' x 25'. and click OK. 7 In the Type Selector. Mass Elements in Design Options | 631 . 14 In the drawing area. enter 90. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. 5 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 8 On the Options Bar.

double-click North. click Modify. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. 19 On the Design Bar. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK twice. under Views (all). and click OK. for the Material parameter. under Elevations. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. specify Mass (Transparent). Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 23 On the View Control Bar. TIP To find the correct shapes. clear Sloped. 22 In the Project Browser. 28 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). under 3D Views. 20 In the drawing area. select the three arc domes. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. While pressing CTRL. click (Add to Design Option Set). and click (Element Properties).TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. select Curved. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and watch the status bar. double-click {3D}.

Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 633 . In this exercise.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click (Design Options).rvt. and click OK. click the Design Options tab. click Save As and save the file as i_Massing_Design_Options. 33 In the Design Options dialog. you placed mass elements into Design Options. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. click Make Primary. you can make it the primary option. 35 On the File menu. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. and click Close. 31 Click the value for Design Option. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. select Curved from the Design Option menu. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. under Option. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. 34 Close the warning that displays. select Curved and.

click Training Files. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 5 In the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Massing_Building_Components. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and for Loc Line. click Wall by Face. double-click {3D}.Brick on CMU.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View toolbar.rvt. select Wall Centerline. click (Pick Faces). 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. select Basic Wall: Exterior . under Views (all). you pick massing faces to create walls.

14 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. under Views (all). double-click Level 5. under Views (all). double-click Level 1. double-click Level 1. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 635 . under Floor Plans. 9 On the Design Bar. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. 8 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 11 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. 16 In the Type Selector. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. click Wall by Face. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Floor Plans.

21 On the Design Bar. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . If desired. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Floor Plans. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 20 On the View Control Bar.18 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. under Views (all). 19 In the Project Browser. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. double-click Level 9.

6 On the Options Bar. double-click {3D}. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. and Walls. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. click Modify. Curtain Systems. click Mass Floors. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. 4 Click OK. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. perimeter. clear Curtain Panels. 8 On the Design Bar. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. volume. 3 On the Model Categories tab. When you select levels. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors.In this exercise. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 637 . select all levels. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all). and exterior surface area. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass.

12 In the Mass Floors dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. select Levels 1-4. 11 On the Options Bar. and select the three 50' x 60' x 40' box mass elements and the mirrored 150' x 15' x 35' box masses as shown. click Mass Floors. 10 Press CTRL. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK.

The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 225' x 30' x 60' box mass element as shown. select Level 1.14 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Mass Floors. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 639 . 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. 15 Press CTRL. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). 16 On the Options Bar.

Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. Floor Perimeter. select Floor Area. schedules can be created using the mass floors. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. and select Level. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. select Mass Floor. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. press and hold SHIFT.rvt. under Available fields. Floor Volume. 4 Using the same method. The Floor Area. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. under Category. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. and click OK. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors.In this exercise. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Add.

enter Retail. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. select Mass: Family and Type. and click OK. Mass Family Box-Training: 50'x60'x40' Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 641 .5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. for Usage. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. for Sort by. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries.

You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Mass: Family and Type. and click Remove. expand Schedules/Quantities. click Edit. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. After you assign usage. and click Properties. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . 14 Select Level. for Fields. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 13 With Usage selected. under Other. click Move Up until Usage is listed first.Mass Family Box-Training: 150'x15'x35' Box-Training: 225'x30'x60' Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 35'x50'x25' Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. under Scheduled fields (in order). the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted.

and click OK. 23 In the Rename View dialog. and click Properties. and click OK. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. 19 Click OK twice. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. under Other. 16 On the Formatting tab. and click Rename. for Field formatting. enter Hotel. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. for Filter by. and select Grand totals. select Floor Area. 22 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. in the field under Filter by. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. and plan views. select Usage. 18 On the Filter tab. click Edit. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 643 . for Filter. and in the field below. click Edit. for Then by. select Level. select Usage. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. for Filter. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. select Calculate totals. 24 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Sort by. under Other. 27 Click OK twice. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. under Fields. elevation.

1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you pick massing faces to create roofs. floor perimeter. 3 Select the top face of the left 50' x 60' x 40' box mass element as shown. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. under Views (all). you created mass floor schedules. The mass floor schedules list. by level. the floor area. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Roof by Face.In this exercise. double-click {3D}. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

Your model should now look as shown. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 50' x 60' x 40' box mass element family. select Basic Roof : Generic .4 In the Type Selector. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 50' x 60' x 40' box mass elements. and also on the top faces of the 150' x 15' x 35' box mass elements. click Create Roof. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 645 . click Create Roof. 5 On the Options Bar.12".

In this exercise. Curtain Systems.8 Using the method you just learned. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. select Sloped Glazing. click Create Roof. and Walls. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 13 Using the same method. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 12 On the Options Bar. select Curtain Panels. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. in the Type Selector. and click OK.

6 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). click Create System.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems | 647 . verify that Select Multiple is selected. double-click {3D}. 5 Press CTRL. 3 In the Type Selector.Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain System : 5' x 5'. click Curtain System by Face. 1 In the Project Browser.

create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing .7 Using the same method. select the blended form on the in-place mass. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.

11 Using the same method. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). Creating Curtain Systems | 649 .9 On the Options Bar. click Create System.

and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.rvt. In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing .12 Click Modify to exit the command. you change the size of an existing mass family.

5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Element Properties). clear Exclude Design Options. 3 On the Model Categories tab. you resize one of the 50' x 60' x 40' box mass elements. 2 On the View menu. click Modify. Floors. under Floor Plans. for Width. under Views (all). enter 105'0". Next. and then click OK. Curtain Systems. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 651 . 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. 6 On the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. 7 On the Options Bar. double-click Site. Roofs. and click OK. and Walls. clear Curtain Panels.1 In the Project Browser. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown.

The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 11 In the Project Browser. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. 12 On the View Control Bar. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. under Floor Plans. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. double-click Level 1. under Views (all).10 Open the 3D view to see the result. 652 | Chapter 17 Massing . In the next steps.

click (Default 3D View). click Remake. 14 On the Options Bar. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. Also. 16 On the View toolbar. you want to select the smaller one. click OK.TIP To select the curtain wall. 17 Select the roof as shown. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 653 .

click Remake.18 On the Options Bar. 654 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Remake. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system.

you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements.rvt. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 655 . under Schedules/Quantities.20 In the Project Browser. 1 Open the 3D view. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. In this exercise. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. you changed the size of an existing mass family. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.

7 Clear one of the check boxes. 9 Select Mass. 4 Rename the view 3D . 6 On the Model Categories tab. 8 Click None to clear the selection. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click {3D}. 3 In the Project Browser. click All to select all categories.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing.Massing only. 656 | Chapter 17 Massing . under 3D Views.

If desired. such as columns and an extruded roof.In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 657 . You might create the model shown. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. This concludes the massing tutorial. to the building shell. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model.

658 .

place. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. the host group is also updated automatically. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. and modify repetitive units. Modifying. or with those working on a different project. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. In another exercise. In this tutorial. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. you also simplify the modification process. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. you add the new model group to a previously created group. You mirror one instance of the group. you not only simplify their placement. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. Creating. hotel rooms. 659 . After you create a model group. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. When you make changes to a nested group. all instances in the building model are updated. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. For example. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. You can also nest groups within other groups. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. In this exercise. The new group is considered nested within the host group. By grouping objects. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. and typical office layouts.

and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium. click Training Files. expand Views (all). NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. enter ZR.rvt. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and double-click First Floor. 2 Click in the drawing area. expand Floor Plans.

and click OK. 4 On the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 661 . The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. click (Group).3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. enter Typical Kitchen.

Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. click Modify. select the center control for the group origin. 7 On the Design Bar. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

right-click Typical Kitchen. 12 On the Design Bar. expand Model. click Modify. and click Create Instance. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. under Groups. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. Creating and Placing a Group | 663 .Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group.

14 On the Edit toolbar. clear Copy. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click (Mirror). The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 15 On the Options Bar.

18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. and on the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 665 . click (Rotate).17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.

select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. as shown. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. and one rotated. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. one mirrored.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. click Modify.

Modifying a Group | 667 . click Save As. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.rvt. and click to select it. and click Save. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. Modifying a Group In this exercise. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. When you finish editing. press TAB to highlight the wall. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. you make changes to an instance of a group. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.

). press TAB. and click to select the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . NOTE To display an excluded element. and click to select the wall. click Modify.3 Click (Group Member. press TAB.).). and click member to group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 4 Move the cursor over the door.). 7 Click (Group Member. 8 On the Design Bar. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. select the element. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall.

Modifying a Group | 669 . and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 14 On the Options Bar. click Modify. clear Tag on Placement. 11 On the Design Bar. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. click Door. click Wall. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. move the cursor to the left. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector.

click Edit Group. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. move the cursor up. All other elements in the model are grayed out. In edit group mode. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 22 In the drawing area. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. click Modify. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner.16 On the Design Bar.

and on the Options Bar. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. click Finish. which acts as the host. 28 On the group editor toolbar. click 27 For Base Offset. (Element Properties). Nesting Groups In this exercise. click Modify. and click OK. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. Nesting Groups | 671 . 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. created in an earlier lesson. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. enter 7'. under Constraints. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. you add the Typical Kitchen group. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group.24 On the Design Bar. for Unconnected Height. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 25 Select the opening. enter 3' 4''.

2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. under Floor Plans. in the Project Browser.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 5 In the drawing area. select the Typical Kitchen group. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. click (Add to Group). 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit Group. double-click First Floor. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 4 On the group editor toolbar.

and each of the bifold doors.6 Press TAB. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. Nesting Groups | 673 . click Finish. select the wall between the folding doors. 7 On the group editor toolbar. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. double-click Second Floor.

you add door tags to a group. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. and filled regions. and create an attached detail group containing the tags.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. such as door and window tags. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. such as text. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. double-click First Floor. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. under Floor Plans. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. In the next exercise. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson.

4 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. 7 On the Design Bar.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. Creating a Detail Group | 675 . click Finish Sketch. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. and select a point below the left elevator. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click to draw a rectangular region.

and select the text note and the filled region. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. as shown. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 12 Enter Tile. click Modify. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 16 In the drawing area. click to add an arc leader. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. and click OK.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. click (Group). and on the Design Bar. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. click Text. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model.

under Groups. expand Detail. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. double-click Second Floor. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click Create Instance.18 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. 21 In the drawing area. 20 In the Project Browser. Because the detail group contains variables. 22 On the Design Bar. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 677 .

you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. clear Leader. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. click Modify. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. as shown. under Floor Plans. 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. 678 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. double-click First Floor.manner that a drawing component can be added. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area.

10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. 8 In the Filter dialog. Using Attached Detail Groups | 679 . click (Filter Selection). select Door Tags. and click OK. and click OK. click (Group). double-click Second Floor. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. click Check None. for Attached Detail Group Name. 9 On the Edit toolbar.7 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.

Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 14 On the Options Bar. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. click Modify. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. 16 On the Design Bar. therefore. Training File 680 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Place Detail.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. When you load the group from the library into a new project. and click OK. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects.

or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. expand Groups. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click Create Instance. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog.rvt. verify that Project is selected. 5 In the New Project dialog. and expand Model. 3 For File name. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit.rvt. browse to the Desktop. 12 On the Design Bar. under Groups\Model. In this case. and click Save. select 2 Bedroom Unit. accept the default template file. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. click OK. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). Saving and Loading Groups | 681 . Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Same as group name is selected. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. for Create new. click Modify. and click Open. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. A warning dialog displays. click Desktop. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click OK. and click Save Group. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance.

25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 24 In the message dialog. click Remove Link. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt file is added as a link to the project. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. click Link. 20 On the Options Bar. click Bind. 23 In the confirmation dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 18 In the Project Browser. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. click Training Files. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the link is removed. 17 On the Design Bar. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog.rvt. click Modify. expand Revit Links.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. When a group is converted to a link. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click OK. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. and on the Options Bar. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click OK. verify that Attached Details is selected only. select the linked Revit model. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. 682 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Use Existing.

islands. and then modify the data. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface.Site 19 In this tutorial. convert the data to a table. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. you add a building pad to the site. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. 683 . You add property lines manually. In the final exercises. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. and walkways. Using Site Tools In this lesson. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data.

684 | Chapter 19 Site . The scale of this view is 1" = 20'. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. click Point. 3 On the Design Bar. click Toposurface. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. click Training Files. 4 On the Options Bar. Using the first method. you create a toposurface using two different methods. right-click in the Design Bar. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_First_Project. expand Views (all). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt This project file was created using the default imperial template. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Site. enter an absolute elevation of 10' 0". and click Site. In the second part of this exercise. expand Floor Plans. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

A toposurface must have at least three elevation points.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. Creating a Toposurface | 685 . 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Use the following illustration as a reference. The circle should be approximately 150' wide. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point.

8 On the Options Bar. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. enter an absolute elevation of 20' 0". 13 In the Site Settings dialog. and 60' absolute elevations. 9 Add a concentric circle of 20' 0" elevation points inside the 10' 0" contour. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Surface. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . under Additional Contours. enter 5' 0". Use the following illustration as a reference. 10 Repeat the previous step for 30'. 40'. click Site Settings. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. under Increment. 12 On the Settings menu. 50'. and click OK.

under Views (all). 19 On the Design Bar. (SteeringWheels). click to view it at various angles. 16 On the View toolbar. click the elevation value. 14 On the View toolbar. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. click (Default 3D View). 18 In the Project Browser. Before importing the contour data. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify. modify the level names and elevations. Creating a Toposurface | 687 . and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. and double-click South. on the Standard toolbar. and press ENTER. enter 3' 0".This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. 15 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click to delete it.

For Colors. and click OK. For Layers. 28 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. it is considered an import symbol. rename the level Base Site Elevation. double-click Site. click Yes. click Modify. 24 In the Project Browser. Verify that Current view only is not selected. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. Until it is exploded. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. and press ENTER. rename the level Basement. Click Open. 23 Click the Level 1 text. under Views (all). 30 On the Edit menu. select Specify. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. click Pin Position. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 29 Select the imported topography. click Training Files.21 Click the Level 2 text. under Floor Plans. select Preserve. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder.

33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. select it. when the edges highlight. 31 On the Design Bar. clear Elevations. and then click OK. click the Annotation Categories tab. click Toposurface. 32 On the View menu. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. Creating a Toposurface | 689 . 36 On the Design Bar.This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. click Modify. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. 34 Under Visibility. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. click Finish Surface.When you select the import symbol. 39 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). 42 On the View toolbar. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. clear C_INDX. click (SteeringWheels). you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . 40 On the View toolbar. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog.

Adding Property Lines | 691 . 4 On the Design Bar.44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. click Lines. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. name the project Site-in progress. click Lines. and click Save. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Property Line. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Select and delete the right vertical line. Using the second method. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. select Create property lines by sketching. On the Design Bar. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. Adding Property Lines on page 691. you add property lines using two methods.rvt. and click OK. Click Modify. do so before continuing. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. Using the first method. Site-in progress. this project file is required in its current state.

692 | Chapter 19 Site . Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. click OK. select the lines. click OK. click 12 On the Design Bar. to delete them. A warning dialog is displayed. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. add an arc line on the right. click Finish Sketch. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. 9 In the warning dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. on the Standard toolbar. when they highlight. 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. click Property Line. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. select Edit Table. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone.

click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. This means there is no gap in the property lines.14 In the Property Lines dialog. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 350' 0" S 0°0'0" E 275' 0" N 90°0'0" W 350' 0" N 0°0'0" E 275' 0" N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. Adding Property Lines | 693 . 16 Click OK. click to place the property lines. If the gap is not closed. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 15 Starting in Row #1.

19 In the Tags dialog. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. In the final step. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. you created two sets of property lines. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. clear Leader. this project file is required in its current state. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. and click OK. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. The tags display more prominently in this view.dwg and click OK. 22 In the Tags dialog. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 25 Under Visibility. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 20 Click Load. Before adding property line segment tags. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Civil\Property Line Tag. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 30 On the View Control Bar. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. and click Drafting. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 695. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.rfa. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Training Files. click the Imported Categories tab. click to place it. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. 27 On the Options Bar. In this exercise. right-click in the Design Bar. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . you loaded and tagged the property line segments. 23 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. click Tag ➤ By Category.

select Dash dot. under Contour Line Display. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Under Line Pattern. In the Object Styles dialog. enter the name Working Contour. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. click New. 7 Click OK. 10 Under Additional Contours.rvt. select Topography. 2 On the Settings menu. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. select a shade of Brown. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. specify the following values: ■ Under Start. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. for Subcategory. enter 3' 0". click Site Settings.In the next exercise. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 695 . and click OK. specify an interval of 2' 0" passing through elevation 0' 0". click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. click Object Styles. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. Under Line Color. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Site-in progress.

select Working Contour.■ ■ Under Range Type. The object style subcategory. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. parking areas. Working Contour. Under Subcategory. In this exercise. 11 Click OK. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . Click Yes when prompted to save changes. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 697. and islands. you create topographic subregions to define roads. select Single Value. The next exercise requires a new training file. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. In the next exercise.

click Subregion.Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . and islands. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces.rvt. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create subregions in order to define roads. click Training Files. parking areas. click Lines. and open Imperial\i_Site. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. try to replicate the location and proportion. Although the exact dimensions are not important. 2 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as material.

Asphalt for Name. click Properties. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . 6 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. 8 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. and click to open the Materials dialog. the vertical rectangle is approximately 64' wide. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. When you finish the sketch in a later step. click the value for Material. select Site . under Materials and Finishes.TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 24' wide. enter Parking for Name.

9 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site - Asphalt. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each, the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Topography Schedule.

NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. As you create new subregions, they display within this schedule. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 12 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. 14 On the Options Bar, click Edit Boundary. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 18' deep to accommodate parking spaces.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 699

TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Delete overlapping lines, and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate.

16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 18 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the project area has increased.

Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. In this training project, additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. Within each subregion, you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 20 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Subregion. 22 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

700 | Chapter 19 Site

23 In the upper-right parking area, use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. Precise dimensions are not important at this time.

24 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the value for Material, and click to open the Materials dialog. 26 In the Materials dialog, select Site - Grass for Name, and click OK. 27 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, enter Island - Grass for Name, and click OK. 28 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 29 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

30 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 701

31 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. Using the techniques learned in previous steps, add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. You must sketch each region separately. Name each region Island Grass, and apply the material Site - Grass.

32 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated.

Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 34 On the Design Bar, click Subregion. 35 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. Name the subregion Walkway, and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Place Concrete - walkway.

702 | Chapter 19 Site

WARNING Subregions cannot intersect, so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 4".

37 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project, there is still only one toposurface. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion, you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 38 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 703

39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder, name the project Site tutorial-in progress.rvt, and click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state. 41 Proceed to the next exercise, Grading the Toposurface on page 704.

Grading the Toposurface
In this exercise, you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. When you use the grading tool, the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 2 Select the toposurface.

704 | Chapter 19 Site

3 On the Options Bar, click

(Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, select Existing for Phase Created, and click OK. A warning dialog is displayed, stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. 5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. RELATED For more information regarding phasing, see the tutorial, Using Phasing on page 767. 6 On the Design Bar, click Graded Region. 7 In the Graded Region dialog, select Copy Internal Points, and click Select and Edit. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 8 Select the topographic surface.

Grading the Toposurface | 705

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.

10 Press DELETE.

706 | Chapter 19 Site

Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing, demolished, and new.

11 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.

Grading the Toposurface | 707

13 Press DELETE. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar, click Point. 15 On the Options Bar, specify an Absolute Elevation of 18' 0". 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway.

17 On the Design Bar, click Finish Surface. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat.

18 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

19 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

708 | Chapter 19 Site

20 On the View toolbar, click to view it at various angles.

(SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface

The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view.

Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu, click View Properties. 22 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, specify Existing for Phase, and click OK. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Therefore, only the original toposurface displays, because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project, you can delete it. 23 Select the toposurface, and delete it. 24 On the View menu, click View Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, specify New Construction for Phase, and click OK. Only the graded topography displays.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state. 27 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Building Pad on page 709.

Adding a Building Pad
In this exercise, you create a building pad. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element, nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. When you add a building pad, it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify.

Adding a Building Pad | 709

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 2 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Pad. NOTE By default, the Pick Walls command is active. If you have an existing building model, you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 4 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar, sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area.

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

710 | Chapter 19 Site

TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry, see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 578.

7 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 8 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View).

9 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new building pad.

10 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Site Components on page 712.

Adding a Building Pad | 711

Adding Site Components
In this exercise, you add parking and planting components to the site surface.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Parking Component. 3 In the Type Selector, select Parking Space: 9' x 18' - 90 deg. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area.

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the parking space. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area.

712 | Chapter 19 Site

NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad.

7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.

8 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

Adding Site Components | 713

9 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new parking spaces.

Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. 12 In the Type Selector, choose any tree type, and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below.

714 | Chapter 19 Site

13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below.

14 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

15 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface.

NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration, the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Adding Site Components | 715

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag Planting Tag: Boxed. double-click Site. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Tag All Not Tagged. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag Parking Tag: Boxed.rvt. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. and click Apply. this project file is required in its current state. 5 On the View menu. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 716.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Hidden Line. and click OK. click Apply. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. under Floor Plans. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. 716 | Chapter 19 Site . You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points.

outside of the site. Click again to the left to position the leader. Click up and to the left. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. In the following exercise. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. as shown: 10 Using the same method. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. to position the shoulder of the leader. 8 On the Options Bar. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 717 . The exact position of the dimensions is not important. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance.

and select the 3 spot dimensions. 12 Press and hold CTRL. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 718 | Chapter 19 Site .

you create a parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 719. 14 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 719 . this project file is required in its current state. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. click Modify. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.■ Clear Leader.

select Mark. select Type. click the Fields tab. double-click Site. 9 On the Window menu. 10 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add. select Type. 12 In the Site plan. 4 Under Available fields. and under Heading. 8 Under Fields. If necessary. under Floor Plans. enter Size. 720 | Chapter 19 Site . and under Heading.rvt. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Mark. and click OK. Site tutorial-in progress. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. select Parking for Category. The parking schedule is displayed. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. click Close Hidden Windows. 7 Under Fields. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. and click Add. under Views (all). 11 On the Window menu. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. 5 Under Available fields. 6 Click the Formatting tab. click Tile. enter Space.

number the first three spaces consecutively. under Space. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. 14 In the Parking Schedule. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. under Space. finish numbering the remaining spaces. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 721 .13 In the Parking Schedule.

722 .

In this tutorial. After the project is shared. and so on. they cannot make changes to it.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. such as walls. use Element Borrowing. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. and click Editable. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. You can enable Worksharing for any project. such as annotations and dimensions. you specify an active workset. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. you must first enable Worksharing. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. 723 . called Worksharing. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. All other team members can view this workset. however. go to the Worksets dialog. floors. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. doors. When you are working on a shared project. stairs. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. Elements specific to a view. A workset is a collection of building elements. select the desired workset. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. Using Worksharing. The first time you activate worksets within a project. To make a workset editable. Working in a shared project In a shared project. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time.

you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. you can select which worksets are open or closed. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. In the next exercise. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. After learning the fundamentals. In the lessons and exercises that follow. Team size 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. In a multi-story structure. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. When setting up Worksharing. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Instead. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. such as a tenant interior. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other.

Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. not including the Project Standards. Team member roles Typically. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. On this tab. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. As new members create worksets for their own use. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. each team member has control over a portion of the design. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. In most projects. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. and View worksets. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. When you create a new workset. Experience has shown that. designers work in teams. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. When creating the new worksets. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Shared Levels and Grids. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. for a typical project. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. with each assigned a specific functional task. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. Regardless of the default setting. You should have at least one workset for each person. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 725 .

Generally. As you work. When you save to the central file. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. you make that workset editable by you. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. your changes are saved. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. When finished or at regular intervals. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. however. Therefore. When you save locally (to your local file). When you save to the central file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you can select which workset is active. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. This makes them available to other team members. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. your changes propagate to the entire team. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. the file is saved as the central file. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. This is called “Selective Open. On the Options Bar. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. within the local file. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. For example. After saving to the central file. However. proceeds as usual.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. if a workset named Interior was created. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. you should then save to your local file. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file.

you should check out the Materials workset. In this situation. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. make any required worksets editable. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 727 . and then save the local file. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. reload the latest changes from the central file. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. In this instance. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. When working remotely. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. save to the central file. using VPN. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. for instance. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. and make that workset editable. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. To do this. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. you work no differently then you would in the office. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. In this conceptual exercise. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. if you know who checked out the required workset. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. Alternatively. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file.

under Show. click Worksets. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. 3 In the Worksets dialog. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu.rvt. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and open Common\c_Worksets. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. Your username displays as the present owner. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. and notice all are editable by you. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. click Training Files. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets.In the next exercise. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. The Worksets dialog displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. In this simple training project. currently named Workset1. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. a small number of team members are working on the building model. 11 In the Worksets dialog. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Project Standards. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all). all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. click OK. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior.When you enable worksharing. In this case. clear Visible by default in all views. you can rename the default workset. and click OK. Because the interior walls appear in many views. it is better to make them visible by default. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. Only User-Created worksets should display. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". Rather than create a new workset for these elements. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. ■ 5 Under Show. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. 8 Click OK. 14 In the Worksets dialog. select Workset1. When you initially activate Worksharing. Therefore. 13 In the Rename dialog. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. 12 Click Rename. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. In this training file. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 729 . 10 Enter Furniture Layout. For example. You do. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. type the name Exterior Shell. another is assigned the interior layout. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. 16 In the drawing area. For training purposes. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. and Views. expand Floor Plans. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. 9 Click New. however. clear Families. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. click New. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. imagine four users including yourself.

and click OK. and walls. stairs. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. click . You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 20 Select one of the interior walls. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 25 In the Element Properties dialog. select Interior Layout for Workset. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. click the Worksets tab. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. under Identity Data. under Identity Data. 23 Select all of the interior elements.17 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 26 On the View menu. click . 29 Click OK. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 19 Click OK. under Identity Data. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 21 On the Options Bar. select Interior Layout for Workset. including the interior doors.

31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. click Save As. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 731 . make sure you remember the location of this central file. Now that you have created the central file. and click OK. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. click Close. 39 Click Save. 41 In the Worksets dialog. select all of the interior elements of the building model. 38 In the Save As dialog. click Non Editable. select Interior Layout for Workset. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. 43 Click OK.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. and click OK. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. click Worksets. you enabled Worksharing on a project. If any interior elements remain. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. 34 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. click . enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. 32 Select Interior Layout. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. double-click Level 2. 30 On the View menu. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. click Visibility/Graphics. 44 On the File menu. 33 In the Project Browser. 42 On the right side of the dialog. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. 35 On the Options Bar. In this exercise. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Worksets tab. under Views (all). under Identity Data.

any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 12 Click OK. you create your local file. and select Yes for Editable. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. and click OK. 6 On the File menu. 2 In the Open dialog. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 11 In the Worksets dialog. please do so before continuing. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 728. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 13 On the Window menu. 15 In the Project Browser. select all the User-Created worksets. check out worksets. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. select Interior Layout. Before working on the model. make modifications to the building model.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. select Interior Layout for Name. expand Floor Plans. 4 Click Open. click Options. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and select Specify. click Worksets. expand Views (all). 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 7 In the Save As dialog. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. In addition. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. select the central file. and click OK. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. and double-click Level 1. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. click Open. Next. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. If you have not yet completed the exercise. You have created a local file which is for your use only. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. In this case. and click Save. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Save As.

Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. If this is selected. click . click Modify. 22 Click OK. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. click . Working Individually with Worksets | 733 . 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. Verify that it is cleared. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 24 Click OK. 18 On the Options Bar. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. you can still edit this wall. under Identity Data. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. notice the Editable Only option. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. click Worksets. On the Options Bar. If it was owned by another user. and click OK. In this case. 23 On the File menu.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. 20 Under Constraints. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. however. Because this element is not owned by another user. In the Worksets dialog. 21 On the Options Bar.

select Basic Wall: Interior . click Wall. click Door. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 34 In the Type Selector. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The precise location is not important. 31 On the Design Bar. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 26 Delete the door.126mm Partition (2-hr). click Modify. 29 In the Type Selector. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm.

This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. add two door openings into the rooms you created. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. make elements editable. You modified the building model. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. save to central. it is recommended. Borrowed Elements is selected. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. and reload the latest changes. When working in your local file. each user must check out worksets. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. please do so before continuing. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. If you have not yet completed these exercises. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. At the end of a work session. leave this file open in its current state. For training purposes. a tooltip. you should relinquish all worksets. click Save to Central. you created your local file. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 735 . which matches the information in the Status Bar. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. and save locally immediately afterward. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. checked out worksets. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. In this particular case. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. two users access the central file through a network connection. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. In this exercise. Throughout the process. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. displays the workset as well as the element type. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. In addition. you should perform regular saves. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. By default. Whenever you save.

and reset the Username to your computer login name. 7 In the Open dialog. 9 Click Open. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. In the following section of this exercise. and click OK. click Save As. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. This is a system setting. click Worksets. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. skip the following section. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and proceed to Creating a local copy. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. one user has already created a local file. In addition. and click OK. 15 On the File menu. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. click Open. 3 On the Settings menu. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. click Options.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. This file is for your use only. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise.rvt. enter User 2. select the central file. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. return to the Settings dialog. For training purposes. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. select all the User-Created worksets. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. You now have a local copy of the project. and select Specify. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. under Username. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. specifically sequenced. instructions are staggered. User 2: Create a local file. 4 Click the General Tab and. 12 In the Save As dialog. click Options. and click Save. 11 On the File menu. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and select Yes for Editable. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. and click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. consider that person to be User 1.

expand Floor Plans. modify the building model. 27 On the File menu. it becomes the active workset. expand Views (all).You are now the owner of that workset. 23 Click OK. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. If it is not open. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. and double-click Level 1. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. and double-click Level 1. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Worksets. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 737 . User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2.” 29 Click OK. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 17 Click OK. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. expand Views (all). 24 In the Project Browser. select the lower exterior wall. open it now. 19 On the File menu. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. and select Yes for Editable. User 1: Check out worksets. click Save to Central. expand Floor Plans. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. If you only have one workset checked out.

However. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. When you save to central. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 41 On the File menu. and click OK. right-click Level 1. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. click Worksets. 37 On the File menu. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. click Reload Latest. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. 42 Select Furniture Layout. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model.” 39 Click OK. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. 33 On the File menu. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. Click Yes. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. and click OK. select Yes for Editable. under Floor Plans. User 1: Reload latest worksets. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 44 In the Project Browser. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. Before adding any furniture.” 35 Click OK. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. 738 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you should create a furniture plan view. The changes User 2 made are apparent. under Floor Plans. click Save to Central. and click Rename. click Save to Central. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. right-click Copy of Level 1. 46 In the Project Browser. 43 In the Project Browser.

click Save to Central. 60 In the Rename dialog. click Edit/New. click Visibility/Graphics. NOTE System families. click the Worksets tab. 62 On the File menu. 65 Click OK. click Component.” 55 Click OK. and click OK. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 739 . such as Wall Types. and click inside any room. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the Visible by default option was not selected. 50 On the View menu. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. 48 In the Type Selector. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. under Show. enter Exterior Wall . rather than Families. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. 66 On the File menu. Therefore. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 61 Click OK 2 times. 49 On the Design Bar. are placed under Project Standards. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.200mm. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. 63 In the Worksets dialog. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. choose any desk. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. click Rename. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. and click OK. click Modify. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. click Reload Latest. click Worksets. click Save to Central. select Project Standards. and click Element Properties. 53 On the File menu. 54 In the Save to Central dialog.

a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. User 1: Reload latest. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. you save the training file as a central file. select Reload Latest. and still have your local files open. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. select the following. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. 3 In the Save As dialog. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. In the final exercise of this tutorial. 70 On the File menu. click Save As. click Training Files. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. Each user checked out worksets. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. In subsequent steps. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). click Options. throughout this training. As each of you work. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). and published their changes back to the central file.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. This exercise requires two users and. and these problems are rectified. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. finished the previous workset exercises. 740 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you need to set up your central and local files. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. leave this file open in its current state. Each user must have network access to the central file. There are specific instructions for each user. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. and click OK. leave this file open in its current state.rvt. select Save to Central. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. and save 69 On the File menu. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. Checking out worksets. modified the building model. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 740. At the appropriate point in this exercise.

click Open. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. The central file should still be open. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. and select Specify. and click OK. and click Save. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets.4 In the File Save Options dialog. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. return to the Settings dialog. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 6 On the File menu. click Options. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 741 . On the Settings menu. In addition. click Save As. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. Set the Username to User 2. click Save As. 18 In the Save As dialog. select the central file. click Options. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. and click OK. 17 On the File menu. select Make this a Central File after save. This is a system setting. and click OK. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 12 On the File menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Next. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 5 Click Save. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and click OK. click Options. 15 Click Open. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 13 In the Open dialog. This is the local file for User 1. You have created a local file which is for your use only. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive.

a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. 22 In the Worksets dialog. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. verify that Editable Only is cleared. select them. and select Yes for Editable. select the second window from the top. 30 On the left exterior wall. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. 24 Under Active Workset. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. select Exterior Shell. and click Editing Requests. if any User-Created worksets are not open. Afterwards. select Interior Layout. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. and then click OK. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. After you submit the request. under Floor Plans. and then click OK. 29 On the Options Bar. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. 742 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 26 In the Worksets dialog. double-click Level 1. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. You are now the owner of that workset. click Worksets. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 27 Under Active Workset. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. click the File menu. select the Interior Layout workset. click Worksets. At this point. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. You are now the owner of that workset.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. and click Open. and select Yes for Editable.

In this multi-user exercise. and the other user granted it. to Local. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. and notice the window is in the new location. and close 39 On the File menu. select Save to Central.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. 35 Click Grant. select the request submitted by User 2. 38 Click OK. A message informs you that your request has been granted. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. click Check Now. 36 Click Close. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 743 . In this case. and click OK. you requested permission to edit the element. select the following. click Close.

744 .

At any time in the design process. 745 . Using design options. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. For example.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. After you and the client agree on the final design. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. In addition. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. In this tutorial. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. you can have multiple sets of design options.

Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. you set up multiple design option sets. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. The client has asked you to create various options. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. make your final design decision.In this particular case. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. In the final exercise of this lesson. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. the only available command is to create a new option set. click Training Files.rvt. each with multiple design options. 2 In the Design Options dialog. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. each is constructed for interchangeability. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . With the second option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. the roof and structure systems must work together. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. In the second exercise. therefore. TIP In this exercise. After you create a design option. click New. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. In the first exercise in this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can edit it. and delete the unwanted options from the project. you design each of the structural options. under Option Set. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options.

expand Views (all). and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. 11 On the Edit toolbar. and the third column centered between the two. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. In this case. 4 In the Project Browser. By selecting Multiple. TIP To center the middle column. click Column.3 Select Option 1 (primary). add three columns. 7 In the Type Selector. 5 On the View menu. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. In the following illustration. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. click Modify. or add a dimension string between the columns. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. expand Floor Plans. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. select: ■ ■ ■ . the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. and click Close. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 9 On the Design Bar. click 12 On the Options Bar. click Edit Selected. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 .

17 Zoom out and. click . 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. they are difficult to see in this view. When you are finished. 18 On the View toolbar. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. Because of the size of the columns. A copy of the three selected columns is added. using the same technique.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one.

you add the beams that span the columns. 21 In the Type Selector. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. Next.Notice the 12 columns that you added. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. select Round Bar : 2". 19 In the Project Browser. and click at its center to set the beam start point. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 23 On the Design Bar. Use the following illustration as a guide. click Beam. double-click TOP OF CORE. Adding a beam is a two-click process. Zoom in on the upper right column. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. In it. The first click specifies the beam start point. under Floor Plans. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. The second click specifies the end of the beam.

and click the center point. click . 30 On the View toolbar. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. and select the center of the column to add a copy. move down to the next set of columns. select: ■ ■ ■ . 28 Zoom out. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .25 On the Edit toolbar. click 26 On the Options Bar. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. zoom into the left column.

under Option. and click OK. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 45 Under Roofing. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click New. click Rename. under Option Set. enter Beam for New. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 37 Select Option 2 and. click Rename. There should now be two roofing design options. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. and click OK. click New. not a new option set. click New. click Rename. and click OK. 32 In the Design Options dialog. under Option Set. under Option. click Rename. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. under Option. enter Roofing for New. name the option Louvers. 40 In the Rename dialog.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. click Rename. enter Brackets for New. 43 In the Rename dialog. 36 In the Rename dialog. under Option. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. 38 In the Rename dialog. enter Structure for New. 34 In the Design Options dialog. 33 Click Finish Editing. and click OK. and click OK. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 46 Under Option. 41 Under Option Set. select Option 1 (primary). Creating the Structural Design Options | 751 . 44 Select the option set Roofing and.

under Floor Plans. 50 In the Design Options dialog. select Option 2. it will resemble the following illustration. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 52 Click Close.47 Under Roofing. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. double-click ROOF TERRACE. you create the second design option. This allows you to more easily manage the project. name the option Sunscreen. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. and click OK. 51 Under Edit. When finished. under Structure. 53 In the Project Browser. Under Now Editing. click Rename. select Beam. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . select Edit Selected. 48 Under Option.

58 On the Tools menu. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. click Component. 56 In the Type Selector. select Roof Beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 753 .55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The second click represents the plane that is moved. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. Refer to the following illustration. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. click Align.

62 Select the beam and. on the Edit toolbar. The first click sets the move start point. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Modify.60 After aligning the beam. The second click represents the move end point. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. 61 On the Design Bar. Click to indicate the end point of the move.

the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. i_Urban_House-in progress. 67 On the Tools menu. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. Notice that even before you close the dialog. click Save As. which is visible by default. 69 Click Close. you need this file in its current state. name the file. click . That is because the brackets option is set to primary. 66 On the View toolbar. 70 On the File menu. click Finish Editing. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.rvt. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. Creating the Structural Design Options | 755 . and click Save. 68 In the Design Options dialog. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory.

7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. each with multiple design options to pick from. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. Sunscreen. you design each of the roofing options. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. a Louver system. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. 3 In the Design Options dialog. 8 In the Type Selector. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options.rvt. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. 4 Under Edit. select Louvers (primary). The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. select Rafter 2 x 10. click Component. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. Under Now Editing. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. 2 On the Tools menu. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. In the next exercise. and double-click TOP OF CORE. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. expand Views (all). 5 Click Close. do so now. 6 In the Project Browser. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . under Roofing. the other for beams. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. open it now. you set up multiple design option sets. The first option. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. If you need to add dimensions. 10 Referring to the following illustration.In this exercise. With the second option. delete them after the rafter is in place. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. click Edit Selected. The second roofing system. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers.

Select 2nd for Move To. 13 On the Options Bar. click . enter 38' 6" for Length. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. 16 On the Options Bar. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. under Other. and click OK. 15 On the Edit menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 757 . 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Enter 5 for Number.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. click Modify. click Array. Select Constrain.

you can enter 3 3. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. TIP When entering a dimension value. when the listening dimension displays. and press ENTER. enter 3' 3". Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. For example. rather than entering 3' 3". The space separates feet and inches.

and select the louver you just placed. 23 On the Options Bar. 27 For the array starting point. Enter 34 for Number. click Component. when the listening dimension displays. Select Constrain. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. and press Enter. 26 On the Options Bar. click Modify. enter 1’. and click OK. 25 With the louver still selected. under Other. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 22 On the Design Bar. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 759 . 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select 2nd for Move To. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. click . and click Array. select Louver 2 x 6. 20 In the Type Selector. click the Edit menu.

click .Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. The louver roof system is complete. 30 On the Tools menu. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. under Edit. 29 On the View toolbar. click Finish Editing. 31 In the Design Options dialog.

click . try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. The first two points define the ends of the line. under Roofing. 33 Under Editing. click Lines. then you can modify it through the dimension.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. click Edit Selected. and then click Close. Click OK. You will fix this in a later step. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. 34 In the Project Browser. and double-click West. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. click Properties. In this case. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 761 . Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. 40 On the Options Bar. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. select Sunscreen. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 41 Select the top of the left column. 39 On the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. expand Elevations. the top of the next column on the right. and click OK. 43 On the Design Bar. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. and the third point defines the arc. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. Therefore.

click Trim/Extend. Under Constraints. 51 In the Design Options dialog. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End.44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Save. you need this file in its current state. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. The louver roof system is complete. click Finish Editing. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 48 On the Design Bar. and then click Close. click . then the center arc. under Edit. In this exercise. The arcs should connect. you designed each of the roofing options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. a Louver system. click Finish Sketch. Select the right arc. 50 On the Tools menu. Under Constraints. 52 On the File menu. 45 Click OK. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. The second roofing system. 49 On the View toolbar. Sunscreen. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 762 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. 46 On the Tools menu. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. The first option.

8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and last options. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. you select a design. expand 3D Views. tertiary. 9 Click OK. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. do so now. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. click the Design Options tab. and delete the discarded design options. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. double-click Primary Option. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. under 3D Views. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Views (all). 4 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. make it part of the building model. click Visibility/Graphics. Managing Design Options | 763 . under 3D Views. enter Primary Option. and click Rename. and click OK. click the Design Options tab. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. secondary. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 5 Right-click each of the copies. 7 On the View menu. right-click {3D}. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). under 3D Views. 2 In the Project Browser. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. under Views (all). After exploring the combinations. 11 On the View menu. and click Rename. double-click Secondary Option. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all).Managing Design Options In this exercise.

15 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 764 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click OK. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. and click OK. double-click Tertiary Option. under 3D Views. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. 18 In the Project Browser.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. click the Design Options tab. 19 On the View menu. double-click Last Option. under Views (all). specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option.

This was the client choice for structural. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. double-click Primary Option. the current primaries are no longer options. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. click Close. 22 On the Tools menu. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. the beam option becomes part of the model. 23 In the Design Options dialog. In this case. click Delete. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. select Make Primary. 24 Under Option. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 26 Under Option Set. The set is deleted. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. 31 In the alert dialog. 27 In the alert dialog. click Yes. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. since you no longer need them. Managing Design Options | 765 . In your design options. Because the client has selected the design option. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. click Delete to remove the views that used options. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. 30 Under Option Set. click Accept Primary.At this point. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. select Beam. click Yes. 29 Select Roofing. 33 In the Design Options dialog. under Structure. 25 Select Structure. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. An alert is displayed. but should be accepted as part of the building model.

you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. After exploring the combinations. 766 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Save. made it part of the building model. 35 On the File menu.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. and deleted the discarded design options. In this exercise. you selected a design.

you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. complete with schedules. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. In the second exercise. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. You create new phases. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. and then add new building model elements.Project Phasing 22 In any project. For the client. demolish existing construction. demolish existing walls and doors. In the lesson and exercises that follow. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. 767 . you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new phases. In the second exercise. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. then add new walls and doors in a different location. This changes room definition and total building model area.

3 In the Element Properties dialog. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. and open Common\c_Phasing. 6 On the Options Bar. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. expand Floor Plans. This means that all building model elements. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. regardless of phase. 7 Click Cancel. go to the Settings menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you wish to do so. and click OK.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. 4 Click Cancel. As you add new elements to the building model. are visible in this view. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. During the demolition and renovation process. and double-click Level 1. click Training Files. In the Element Properties dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. define the units. click (Element Properties). then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. you do not need to change the project units to metric. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . you work in a simple model that requires renovation. click Modify. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. under Phasing. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template.rvt. expand Views (all). Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. When you create a new project. click Project Units. under Phasing. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created.

right-click Level 1 . and click OK.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. are highlighted in red. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. and click OK.Demo. for Phase Created. TIP If this were a multi-story building. 17 Click No. under Floor Plans.Existing. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. under Floor Plans. After you release the mouse button. right-click Level 1. all of the building model elements. Phasing Your Model | 769 . right-click Copy of Level 1 . 14 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click . and click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. 10 On the Options Bar. click (Filter Selection). you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. After you create the views. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Project Browser. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. 11 In the Filter dialog. select Existing. clear Door Tags. 12 On the Options Bar.Existing. click Modify. 18 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. under Phasing. and click OK. and click Rename.Existing. enter Level 1 . including the door tags. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 20 In the Rename dialog. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. Because this is a phase-specific view. 16 In the Rename dialog. Because this is a renovation project. enter Level 1 .

double-click Level 1 . Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status.Existing. for Phase.Demo. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. you modify these settings. Because of this time relationship. In this case. There are five default phase filters. enter Composite Plan. 24 In the Project Browser. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. Later in this exercise. 29 For Composite Plan. On a logical time line. select Overridden. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . under Floor Plans. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. You may need to zoom in to see this. and click OK. Existing. 28 Under Filter Name. under Floor Plans. Next. 21 In the Project Browser. 27 Click New. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. Phase status is time-dependent. new construction occurs after existing construction. and Temporary. under New. however. double-click Level 1 . You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. click the Phase Filters tab. select Existing. under Phasing. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. to which all the building model elements belong. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. 26 In the Phasing dialog. Demolished. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New.

specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. click OK. 36 Using the same method. click the value for Color. 35 Click OK twice. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. select red. under Floor Plans. select the line style. 32 In the Demolished row. 42 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. double-click Level 1 . click (Demolish). Phasing Your Model | 771 . its display changes to a red dashed line. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. select the interior walls one at a time.Demo. double-click Level 1 . That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. When you demolish the host. 34 In the Color dialog. under Cut ➤ Lines. As you click each wall. select Demolished.Existing. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. or you can use the demolish tool. 39 In the Phasing dialog. There are two ways to demolish an element. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display.31 Under Phase Status. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. you demolish all elements hosted by it. you begin demolition. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. Next. select a lighter blue. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration.

click Wall. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. for Phase Filter. 53 Open Level 1 . 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 55 In the Element Properties dialog.Existing. 51 Add a door leading into each room. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 49 On the Design Bar. add a long horizontal wall.Demo. and click OK. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. for Phase Filter. The demolished walls no longer display. 52 Open Level 1 . select Show Previous + New. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 47 In the Type Selector. and click OK. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 772 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . under Phasing.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). click Door. under Phasing. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 50 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall: Interior . and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84".44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter.Demo. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . All elements are displayed in this view. 59 Open Level 1 . Phasing Your Model | 773 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Level 1 . The renovated building model plan is displayed.New. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. click (Default 3D View). 61 On the View Control Bar. regardless of phase. and existing shows as half-tone. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). new is shown in blue. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. 62 If necessary. because the phase filter is set to Show All. 57 In the Project Browser. which are displayed as red.New. 60 On the View toolbar.

If you wish to do so. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. and new construction. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. sizes.New. and double-click Level 1 . You can also see that the room quantities. 2 Open Level 1 . Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. In this view. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. All room boundaries are phase-specific. In the left pane of the Open dialog. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. the rooms change in both definition and size. and click OK. 774 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . As the renovation process continues. If you wish to save this file. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style.rvt. 3 Open Level 1 .Existing. click Project Units. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 63 Close the file. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. In the next exercise. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. you can see the new walls added to the building model. In this view. In this exercise. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. you do not need to change the project units to metric. Notice that this view is the original building model. you can do so at this time. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. define the units. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. go to the Settings menu.Demo. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. click Training Files. therefore. demolition. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise.

Existing. 11 On the Design Bar.New. 9 On the Design Bar. click Room. 13 Open Level 1 . click in each room as you move to the right. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 775 .4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. yet they have different room numbers. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. click Room Tag. In the Phasing dialog.Demo. Use the following illustration as a guide. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click OK. click Room. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 10 Open Level 1 . 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. and maximize the view. 6 Open Level 1 . click in each room to create a room and place a room tag.

20 Close the file. 776 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. and double-click Room Schedule . In this exercise. click Close Hidden Windows. 16 In the Project Browser. In this case. View phase-specific room schedules.New Construction. 19 On the Window menu. 17 On the Window menu. In addition. expand Schedules/Quantities. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms.15 Using the following illustration as a guide.Existing. click Tile. The two schedule views tile. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. 18 Open Room Schedule . Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase.

and manage the links throughout the project. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. modify their visibility. In the final lesson. Comparison of alternatives on a site. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. performance. 777 . You position the building models on the site plan. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. In this tutorial. In these situations.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. This maximizes efficiency. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files.

Linking Building Models In this lesson. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. You position the building models on the site. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. and the other is a townhouse. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. You link two building models to the project. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. One building model is a condominium. modify their visibility. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files.

you can do so. 2 On the File menu. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. click Save As.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. select the three files. Auto . RELATED See the lesson. 8 Clear Read-only. in the Model Linking folder that you created. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . click Open. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Open. however. this option will place the link at a predefined location. and save the file there.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. Otherwise. with write permission. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . this system is not exposed to the user. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. This option is grayed out. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder.■ Auto . Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 795. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. click Close.rvt. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. Manual . Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. c_Townhouse. 4 On the File menu. and click OK.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. and open Common\c_Site. ■ ■ Manual . navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. and click Properties. click Training Files.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. right-click. All three files now reside. Select c_Site. 5 On the File menu. c_Condo_Complex.

expand Views (all). 13 Click Open. and double-click Level 1.Origin to Origin. For Positioning. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .■ Click Open. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. expand Floor Plans. select Auto . 11 On the File menu. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. Notice the blue detail lines. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. 10 In the Project Browser.

similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. 16 For the move start point. 15 On the Edit toolbar. 17 For the move endpoint. Standard move commands work with linked building models. After you select it.Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. click (Move). click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. The Move command requires two clicks. The second click specifies the move endpoint. The first click specifies the move start point. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. The linked model moves as one object. After you specify the location to move to. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 781 .rvt displays in the Type Selector. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines.

Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Auto . The townhouse building model displays above the site model. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. and select c_Townhouse. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it.Origin to Origin. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. 21 Click Open. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.18 On the View menu. For Positioning.

click (Rotate). 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. you first specify the rotation start point. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. when the vertical line displays.23 On the Edit toolbar. click to specify the rotation start point. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. In this case. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 783 . To rotate an object. and click to specify the end of the rotation.

Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. click (Move). 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point.

Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 785 . 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. The Copy command works much like the Move command.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. 30 For the starting point. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. click (Copy). Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. The first click specifies the start point.

NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. for Name. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Rotate. and click OK. click (Default 3D View). under Identity data. click . 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 On the View toolbar. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. 34 On the Options Bar. use the Move command to make any adjustments. 32 On the Edit menu. enter Townhouse A.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left.

38 On the File menu. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. click and hold Orbit. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 787 . you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. do so before continuing. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. click Save. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. they were placed too low within the site topography. 2 On the SteeringWheels. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. you need this project file open and in this view. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. When you originally linked the files. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. After linking the files. In the next exercise. In this exercise. click (SteeringWheels).

Click the Revit Links tab. when it highlights. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. and double-click South.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. To do this. expand Elevations. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. click (Align). and click OK. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. and then select the plane that you want to align. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. and click to select the line. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. you first select the plane you want to align to. 3 In the Project Browser. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. When using the Align command. In the steps that follow. 7 On the Tools toolbar. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. In this case. and click to select it. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. under Views (all).rvt.

under Elevations. This would over-constrain the model. click 13 On the View toolbar. 9 In the Project Browser. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. (SteeringWheels). Both townhouses should be at the proper level. 15 On the File menu. 14 On the SteeringWheels. click Save. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. 11 Return to the South elevation view. click (Default 3D View). Repositioning Linked Building Models | 789 . click and hold Orbit. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. 12 On the View toolbar. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. double-click North.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.

6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you can independently control the visibility settings. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. 4 Under Visibility. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. 10 Click OK. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. double-click South. By linked view. click OK. In the next exercise. click Visibility/Graphics. 2 On the View menu. detail level. 8 For Annotation Categories.rvt. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. under Elevations. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. or Custom. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. When you link a file. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 9 Under Visibility. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. If the Basics page is set to Custom. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. expand c_Townhouse. click Custom. do so before continuing. click the Revit Links tab. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. display settings. scroll down and clear Levels. you need this project file open and in this view. and the halftone settings for each linked project.rvt. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. select <Custom>. click By Host View. In this exercise. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. As you can see. the defaults are set to By host view for all options.

By default. click By Host View. no detail level changes are required. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Revit Links tab. With linked files. click Visibility/Graphics. under Floor Plans. and then set the detail level to coarse. 24 Click OK. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. 20 For c_Townhouse. double-click Level 1. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. under Display Settings. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 14 On the View menu. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. By selecting custom under Model Categories. expand c_Townhouse. Using the Custom option. click the Revit Links tab. click Visibility/Graphics. 16 Under Visibility. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. on the Basics tab. medium. In this case.rvt. and click OK. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. select <Custom>. 23 In the Model categories list.rvt. or fine. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 791 . 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model.rvt. select Custom. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. You can click the value for Detail Level.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness.

you need this project file open and in this view. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. However. In this exercise. and phase filter of a specific link. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. on a sloped site for instance. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. In the next exercise. In most cases. existing. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In this case. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. 28 Select By linked view for View range.rvt. under Visibility. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. phase. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. you manage the linked files. click Custom for the Townhouse link.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. this is preferable. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. By default. 26 Under Display Settings. demolished. select c_Townhouse. 31 On the File menu. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. click Save. All other components are grayed out. click OK. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. 25 On the Revit Links tab. there are situations. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. With the Show All filter applied. all new. In this case. 29 Click OK.

Locations Not Saved. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. 3 Under Path Type. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. 2 In the Manage Links dialog.rvt. do so before continuing. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. The default path type is Relative. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. click the Revit tab. Managing Linked Building Models | 793 . Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 4 Under Linked File. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. They supply information regarding the links. You learn more about this in the next lesson. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. In a shared coordinate environment. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. and Saved Path fields are read only. 5 Click Unload. select c_Condo_Complex. 7 Click OK. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. click Manage Links. the link is maintained. Notice the Loaded. In general. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. 6 At the confirmation prompt. click Yes.

Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. When you initially place the link. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. click Save As. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. and select Specify. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. and click Reload. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. To do this.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. In general. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects.rvt. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. If you choose not to open that workset. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 On the File menu. the link is not loaded. right-click c_Condo_Complex. In these cases. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. However. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. expand Revit Links. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. click the arrow next to the Open button.

navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. When used in conjunction with model linking. In the next lesson. In this exercise. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. leave the project file open in its current view. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. you are establishing a shared origin point. and save it as an RVT file. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. In essence. The host file consists primarily of site components. and the resulting project files. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. do so before continuing. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. name the file Site_Project. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 778. When you share coordinates between projects. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). When Revit project views are exported to DWG. If you have not completed the previous lesson.10 In the Save As dialog. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 795 . you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson.

and the resulting project files. click the Condo Complex.coordinates are used. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. When you are working in the host project. do so before continuing. 3 In the drawing area. In this case. open it before continuing. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. As indicated in the Status Bar. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. click Open. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. 2 On the Tools menu. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. If you have not completed the lesson.rvt and click Open. Linking Building Models on page 778. Select Site_Project. If you have closed the project. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

this location is not saved outside of the host project. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. and Lot C. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 797 .4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. select Location 1. 5 On the Design Bar. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. On the Status Bar. Lot B. In this exercise. when the edges highlight. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. even though both models originate from one linked file. and click OK. If you have not completed the exercise. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. but can have multiple additional locations. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. However. it is placed at a specific location. do so before continuing. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. These three locations can be named Lot A. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. click to select it. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. you need this project file open and in this view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host.

you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. click Rename. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. 4 Under Value. In the Choose Location dialog. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. 12 On the Options Bar. This is a one-time operation. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 3 In the Element Properties dialog.2 On the Options Bar. click OK. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. 9 In the Select Location dialog. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. When constraining a link to a location. and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Move instance to. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. click . a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. under Instance Parameters. enter Lot A for New. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. Record the current position as a location. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Not Shared for Shared Location. click Reconcile. . After a link instance is assigned a shared location. 7 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. under Instance Parameters. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. click Change. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates.

31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. When you release the mouse button. select Save. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. click OK. and click OK. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. and then select the townhouse project. Notice the OK button is still not active. To explicitly save a location. make sure Lot B is selected. 30 On the Tools menu. 26 Click OK. and click OK. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. the active location position is moved. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. select the second option. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. or cancel the action. click Duplicate. click the Revit tab. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 799 . This is a two-click process. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. enter Lot B for Name. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. 19 In the Select Location dialog. and the left townhouse resides at that location. a warning displays. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. By relocating a project. Save locations 21 On the File menu. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. ignore the warning. you cannot redefine its location. Record current position as.Notice the OK button is not active. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. 16 Click Change. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. When you create a location. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. click OK. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Manage Links. The first click specifies the move start point. 23 Click Save Locations. and click OK. Because Lot A is currently in use. When you relocate a project. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. 20 In the Element Properties dialog.

Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. and click OK. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. In this exercise. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. select Save. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. 33 On the Edit menu. NOTE In the following exercise. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. 36 On the File menu. 34 On the File menu. click Close. you work in one of the linked projects. 800 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Save.

under Floor Plans.rvt file. In addition. Because this building model only has one named location. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. If you have not completed the exercises. For Positioning. 2 On the File menu. select Auto .rvt file. In this exercise. click Open. When opening the linked file. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files.By Shared Coordinates. Working with a Linked Building Model | 801 . Select c_Condo_Complex. The current active location is Lot A. double-click 1st Floor. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. it is placed automatically within the host project. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. do so before continuing. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. Also. if other models were linked into the same host. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Click Open. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

and click OK. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 7 Click OK. you manage the shared locations. orient a view to true north. click View Properties. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. 6 Select Lot B. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. and click Make Current. 3 In the Name dialog.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. click Duplicate. enter Lot C. In the host file. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. click Manage Place and Locations. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. you create a new location. you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. under Graphics. select True North for Orientation. 802 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click OK. In this exercise. click OK. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. In the next exercise. you can select Lot C if necessary. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. do so before continuing. If you have not completed the exercises. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. click Manage Place and Locations. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance.

Select Site_Project. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 803 . Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files.rvt and click Open. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. click Close. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You can save the file if you wish. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. do so before continuing.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. On the Options Bar. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. If you have not completed the exercise. 10 On the File menu. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates.

and click Add. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. under Category. 804 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Count. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Doors. click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields.

right-click Door Schedule. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 805 . and click Properties. 13 On the File menu. under Other. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Itemize every instance. click Close. 12 Select Grand totals. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. expand Schedules/Quantities. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. click Save. In this exercise. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. 14 On the File menu. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components.8 Click OK. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. select Family and Type for Sort by. You have completed this tutorial. and then click OK twice. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

806 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 807 .

808 .

809 . selection default options. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. In the second lesson. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. notification preferences. and click OK. you modify the system environment. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. Finally. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click OK. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. they are not saved to project files or template files. Notice that the drawing area is black. select Invert background color. 3 In the Options dialog. 6 In the New Project dialog. 4 Under Colors. These settings control the graphics. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Training Files. under Template file. click Browse. which is independent of the project settings. In the first lesson. 8 In the New Project dialog. journal cleanup options. click the Graphics tab. you create an office template. and your username when using worksets. and set it as your default template.

17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. For Selection color. click Wall. 12 In the Color dialog. select One hour. select None.10 In the Options dialog. select red. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval.rvt. click the value for Selection color. select yellow. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 Under Colors. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 26 In the Options dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. click Modify. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. and open Imperial\i_Settings. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs. the elements causing the error display using this color. 22 When prompted to save changes. click the Graphics tab. 14 Under Notifications. 18 On the Design Bar. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. clear Invert background color. and click OK. and select the wall. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Training Files. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Modify. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. 15 Click OK. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Graphics tab. However. For Tooltip assistance. click No. 13 Click the General tab.

5 Under Default path for user files. you specify default file locations. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. 2 In the Options dialog. you can start a new project with that template. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. centralized. Under Journal File Cleanup. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. 4 Click Cancel. 7 In the Options dialog. click Browse. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. Your login name displays by default. family template files. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. such as in a large. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. These files are used in the software support process. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 811 . TIP To view a template. click Places. do not save the changes. including your default project template. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. If prompted. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. select the folder to save your files to by default. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. and family libraries. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 8 Click Cancel. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. Under Username. and click Open. select Normal. click Browse. Specifying File Locations on page 811. notice the list of library names. 3 Under Default template file. 10 In the Places dialog. click the File Locations tab. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. under Default path for family template files. click Browse. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and click Browse to select a template. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. For Tooltip assistance.27 Click the General tab. select your preferred Save reminder interval. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). This path is set automatically during the installation process. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. However. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. These are the family templates that you use to create new families.

you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. or families. In the following illustration. and you can create new libraries. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. click (Add Value). templates. saving. and change the name to My Library. and click Open. or loading a Revit Architecture file. Save. and select it as the library path. 11 In the Places dialog. When you are opening. and Import dialogs. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click the icon side of the field. under Libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open.library names and path. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. Load. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

3 Under Settings. If you work in a large office. If you want to relocate this path. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 21 Click the File Locations tab. click My Library. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. click the Spelling tab. Load. 5 In the text editor. custom color files. view the current path. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 9 In the text editor. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. click Edit. and click OK twice. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. (Remove Value) to delete the library. This path is determined during installation. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. scroll down the list of building industry terms. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. click Edit. Save. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Specifying Spelling Options | 813 . Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. 15 Under Library Name. 28 Click OK. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. and Import dialogs. and decal image files. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 22 Click Places. enter sheetmtl-Cu. click the My Library icon. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Options dialog. such as bump maps. 19 Click Cancel.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 23 Select My Library. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. specify the new location here. Specifying Spelling Options on page 813. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 24 Click 25 Click OK.

Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. You can turn snap settings on and off. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. you modify snap settings. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 4 In the New Project dialog. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click default template. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 19 Under Settings. click Text. click the Spelling tab. click File menu ➤ Save. do not save the changes. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. work with snapping turned off. click OK. click Browse. click OK. 12 On the Standard toolbar. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Restore Defaults. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. click OK. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. 22 In the text editor. 23 In the Options dialog. As you zoom in and out within a view. Modifying Snap Settings on page 814. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Options dialog. under Template file. If prompted. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. In this exercise.11 In the Options dialog. click Modify. you modify snap increments. 20 Under Personal dictionary. 21 In the text editor. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Edit. click Training Files.rte. delete sheetmtl-CU. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.

you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. snapping reverts to the system default settings. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. and move the cursor to the right. If you do not have a wheel button. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys.6 Under Dimension Snaps. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . and enter 1 . click OK. 8 In the Snaps dialog. For example. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. clear Chain. click Wall. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. use the wheel button on your mouse. Modifying Snap Settings | 815 . TIP To zoom while sketching. zoom out until it does so.. 7 Under Object Snaps. enter SM. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. If it does not. While sketching. such as ZO to zoom out.

Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 21 Move the cursor downward. and specify the wall endpoint. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. click Modify. and delete the value 1’ . the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Modifying Project Settings on page 817. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. If you move the cursor along the wall. the midpoint. 24 Click OK.This is the increment that you added previously. and do not save the file. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Notice that snapping is once again active. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely.. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Do not set the wall end point. and click Wall. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. it will snap to the endpoints. 18 Enter SM. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and move the cursor to the right. and the wall edges.

When you apply a material to an element. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. Modifying Project Settings | 817 . you render a region to observe the changes. fill patterns. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Using these options. annotations. and object styles. save the project file with a unique name. You create and modify materials. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. Finally.rvt. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. lines. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. and use it to complete the remaining exercises.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the steps that follow. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_Settings. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file.

this material provides a starting point for the new material.Fieldstone. Masonry . In the next exercise.Stone. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. 6 Click Replace. and texture of the material. 3 Click (Duplicate). The Render Appearance Library is a local. and double-click 02 Entry Level. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. and select Masonry . Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. 2 Scroll down the materials list. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. The properties describe the color. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 9 Click Apply. and click OK. read-only library for render appearances. and click OK. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. and click (Element Properties). Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. When you change properties of a render appearance.Fieldstone. However. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. When a model element is loaded into a project. 11 Click OK. These details will display in rendered images.Fieldstone material. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. select Stone. scale. enter Masonry . for Class. 10 Click the Graphics tab. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. In the steps that follow. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. In the Materials dialog. 8 Select Riverstone Blue.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog.

the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. 17 For Structure. and click OK.14 In the Element Properties dialog. select the rear exterior wall. Fieldstone on CMU. click Model Graphics Style. 15 Click Duplicate. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall.Fieldstone.Brick. 21 Click OK three times. 16 Enter the new wall name. click in the Material field. 19 On the right side of the Material field. 24 In the Type Selector. 22 Select the left exterior wall. Creating and Applying Materials | 819 . 23 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. select Masonry . 20 In the Materials dialog. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . click This is the material that you created. click Edit. click Edit/New. 26 On the View Control Bar. 18 For Finish 1. click (Default 3D View). . 25 On the View toolbar.Fieldstone.

under Quality.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. select Low or Medium. select Region. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. select the render region (a red rectangle). The rendering process begins. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. In the following exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 821. for Setting. right-click the Design Bar. and click Rendering. click Rendering Dialog. 31 In the Rendering dialog. 28 In the Rendering dialog. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. click Render. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . When finished. 32 In the Rendering dialog. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. 29 In the 3D view.

Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. and save the file as i_Settings-in progress. and clear Region. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 821 . click Show the model. such as steel. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. i_Settings-in progress. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. Then click Render again. Zoom into the model. expand Elevations. click Show the model. 33 In the Rendering dialog. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. in the Rendering dialog. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern.rvt. Drafting pattern density is fixed. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 821. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. and double-click West. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser.

pat. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. and click OK. click 15 For Structure. 8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. (Element Properties). 11 Click OK. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . enter Fieldstone. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. click Import. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click . click Edit/New. 9 Under Custom. click in the Material field. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. and for Import scale. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. choose Model. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model.56. select Custom. 7 Under Custom. click Edit.Fieldstone. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. select fldstn. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 5 Click New. 3 Under Pattern Type. click Training Files. 10 For Name. for Finish 1. enter . 13 On the Options Bar. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available.

Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click OK. there are often multiple window types within a project. i_Settings-in progress. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. click to select a fill pattern. and double-click 3 Windows.Fieldstone material. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. you can set the window frame material to By Category. click (Default 3D View). 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Controlling Object Styles | 823 . expand 3D Views. and click OK. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Controlling Object Styles on page 823. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 Click OK three times. 21 In the Materials dialog. TIP If the pattern does not display. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Modify. For example. 18 Under Surface Pattern. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. 23 On the Design Bar. adjust your zoom settings as needed. select Model. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry .In the Materials dialog. under Pattern Type. 25 On the View toolbar. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill.

click (Element Properties). 12 In the Element Properties dialog. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. click By Category (located under the materials list). and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. under Materials and Finishes. click Modify. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Materials dialog. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Edit/New. and click 15 Click OK twice. under Materials and Finishes. for Trim Exterior Material. for Trim Exterior Material. 9 Click OK twice. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 16 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. . use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value column.2 On the keyboard. click Edit/New. 10 Select the arched window. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. click By Category. click (Element Properties). 14 In the Materials dialog. and click . click in the Value column. 3 On the View Control Bar.

. (Duplicate). Controlling Object Styles | 825 . select Paint. Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 19 For Trim. expand Windows. descriptions.red paint.Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. or keywords include the word red. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. for Class. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. 25 In the search field. for Name. and click OK. click in the Material column. type red. 18 On the Model Objects tab. select Trim. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. 23 Click Replace. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. enter Trim . and select Trim.

rvt. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. is open with the 3D view active. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 28 Under Shading. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. for Name. enter Roof Line. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. click OK. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. i_Settings-in progress. i_Settings-in progress. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. click New. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns.rvt. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 826. 31 On the View toolbar. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. (Default 3D view). 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. 29 In the Materials dialog. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. When you render a 3D view. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click OK. and click OK. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save.26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy.

9 In the Object Styles dialog. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. under Category. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 827 . select Roofs. select Roof Line. 11 For Line Pattern. 7 On the View Control Bar. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.6 Click OK twice. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. Now that you have created a line pattern. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Red. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 12 Click OK. 10 For Line Color.

NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. 15 In the Project Browser. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. but not the line pattern. 14 On the View Control Bar. double-click 03 Roof. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .13 In the Project Browser. Notice that the line color displays in this view. elevations. double-click to Building. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. click Model Graphics Style. under Floor Plans. Plans. under 3D Views. sections. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line.

This places the line above the topography. select Roofs. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. select Solid. select Black. For Pattern. select Roof Line. click Lines.16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. ■ Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 829 . 31 Click OK. 18 For Line Color. 25 Click OK twice. 34 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. select 5. 33 In the Type Selector. select Double Dash 5/8" . For Line Color. click New. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. select Zoning Setback. double-click Site. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. For Color. under Floor Plans. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 20 Click OK. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. select Roofs. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. under Modify Subcategories. enter Zoning Setback. select Level: 02 Entry Level. select Red. select Blue. For Line Pattern. 19 For Line Pattern. specify the following: ■ For Plane. click Override. 29 For Name. under Category. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. for Visibility. Click (Draw). 30 For the Zoning Setback category. 22 On the Model Categories tab. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. select 2. Notice the site topography and the property lines.

as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. Expand Site. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Lines. 44 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. and then clear Property Lines. 43 Click OK. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 36 On the View toolbar. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. (Default 3D View). NOTE If Site is not selected. Modifying Annotations on page 831. and clear Zoning Setback. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 40 In the Project Browser. select it. 38 On the Model Categories tab. 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. double-click 02 Entry Level. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 46 Proceed to the next exercise.■ Click (Line). and clear Zoning Setback. 39 Click OK. under Floor Plans. and clear Property Lines.

Metric.Metric and click OK. select Millimeters. 4 Enter the name Linear . click Dimension.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. To place a dimension. (Undo). 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and place a dimension on the floor plan. click the default value. Modifying Annotations | 831 . you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. For Unit suffix. i_Settings-in progress. 9 In the Type Selector. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate.rvt. under Floor Plans. click one wall.rvt. select Linear . For Units. for Units Format. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. click Modify. 7 Click OK twice. i_Settings-in progress. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. You have created a new dimension style. 5 Under Text. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. double-click 02 Entry Level. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select mm. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 10 On the Standard toolbar. and then click outside the second wall. click another wall. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged.rfa. click (Element Properties). 28 On the Design Bar. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. In the steps that follow. and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. click Training Files. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag . Window Tag . This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 16 Click Cancel.Number as the assigned tag. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. 19 Click Load. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. notice that the label displays 1i. 21 In the Tags dialog. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. 30 Under Leader.Number is now the assigned tag. click Tag ➤ By Category. Under Category. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. notice Window Tags appears twice. scroll down to Windows. 22 Under Loaded Tags.Number. under Category. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 23 Click OK. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. 24 While pressing CTRL. Leave Window Tag . click Window Tag . 26 On the Options Bar. Then press Delete. click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 On the Options Bar. select the 3 window tags. verify that Create is clear. scroll to Windows and notice that Window Tag . click the bottom window. 27 On the west wall. 18 In the Tags dialog. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Number. In the preview image. the other displays the instance value. clear Leader. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.Number.

The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. for Rounding. and Detail Level Options on page 833. 31 On the Design Bar. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. (Default 3D View). and click OK. select Openings. for Area. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Specifying Units of Measurement. 6 Click OK. dimension values display using this setting. Click OK. Unless overridden. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. Specifying Units of Measurement. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. Specifying Units of Measurement. you specify the project units of measurements. select SF.rvt. Temporary Dimensions. dimensions use these project settings. 4 In the Project Units dialog. and click OK. select Faces. select 0 decimal places. 9 Under Doors and Windows. In the first section. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. and Detail Level Options | 833 . you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. 32 On the View toolbar. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. i_Settings-in progress. select To the nearest 1/16". In the final section. In this project. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 8 Under Walls. click Modify. click the default value. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save.Temporary Dimensions. for Length. For Unit symbol. In the second section. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. 3 In the Format dialog. you modify the temporary dimension settings. you modify the detail level assignments.The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Unless overridden.Temporary Dimensions. 2 In the Project Units dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click the default value.

you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. click .rvt. Notice the 1/4" = 1’ 0" view scale moved to the Medium column. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 834.When you create a new view and specify its view scale. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. You do not select a view scale to move it. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. 12 Click OK. Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. click Training Files. and expand 3D Views. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. In this table.

In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). and click OK. 5 On the Views tab. expand each sheet set. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click OK. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. 13 Select Sheet Prefix.2 In the Project Browser.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. and click Apply. 10 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . and notice that each is grouped by discipline. select Type/Discipline. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 14 In the Project Browser. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. In the Project Browser. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . expand each view type. and click OK.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. under Sheets. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 835 . notice that views are grouped by phase. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 8 Select Phase. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. select Discipline.

If you want to save this file. In the lesson that follows. and click OK. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work.Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. navigate to your preferred directory. enter a unique file name. and click OK. 21 In the Project Browser. 16 Click the Views tab. under Views. Creating an Office Template on page 837. and expand both Architectural and Structural. you create an office template. 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . View Type (Family and Type). 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. Proceed to the next lesson. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. and click New. click the Folders tab. In this lesson. You can also save these settings in a template file. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog. and Discipline. expand Complete. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. expand 3D Views. and click OK. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog.

If you have additional projects open. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. In that case. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. in the drawing area. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. 2 Under Template file. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. 12 Under Template File. 4 Select the Construction-Default.Creating an Office Template In this lesson. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. click Browse. When you create new projects. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. 6 Click OK. and open Imperial\Templates. for Create new. dimensions styles. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. For example. 5 In the New Project dialog. 9 In the Project Browser. when you create a new project. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. and double-click North. levels. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Training Files. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. Whenever you create a new project or template. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. close them. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. and click Open. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. click Browse. When you create a new template based on an existing template. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Creating an Office Template | 837 . Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. and view names. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. select Project. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. drag a zoom region around the level heads. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. 7 In the Project Browser. You can choose from several templates. the same rules apply. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. you select the starting point for your office template.rte template.

specific modifications are not dictated. Modifying System Settings on page 809. or refer to the online help. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. transparency. When you create the material. 15 Under Create new. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. see Modifying Project Settings on page 817. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. In this exercise. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. and similar attributes. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. You do this by defining the render appearance. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. you can select it now. For example. texture. create and modify them as needed.13 Select the default template. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. select Project template. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . including color. If you want to use a template other than the default. 14 Click Open. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. see the previous lesson. or refer to the online help. When you create or modify a material. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. Modifying Project Settings on page 838. weights. TIP For more information about creating new materials. you modify the project settings for your new template. During this exercise. and click OK. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. For more details on modifying these settings. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 2 Scroll down the materials list. Observe the materials that are already defined.

and materials for model objects. the changes are saved as part of the project template. If you change render appearance properties. line patterns. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. 4 Click Replace. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. For more information. create new line subcategories. In the Object Styles dialog. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. see a preview of the rendered material. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. and move model patterns. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. and imported objects. annotation objects. Modifying Project Settings | 839 . see Specifying File Locations on page 811. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. modify the line weight. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. 18 For existing line categories. line colors. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. line color. 9 Click OK when finished. 20 Click OK. and change render appearance properties. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. you can set line weights. You can add and delete view scales. You can align.3 Click the Render Appearance tab. See Modifying Project Settings on page 817 for more information on creating new fill patterns. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. 15 Modify categories. create new subcategories. rotate. 13 If necessary. or line pattern as needed. and scroll through the list of categories. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. and create new subcategories as needed. 19 If necessary. or modify existing patterns. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab.

You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. To see the details of a particular style. select it. Linear. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. select it from this list. name the style. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. select it from this list. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 40 Click OK. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. click Duplicate. and specify the properties. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 46 Click OK.The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. and dimensions. click Duplicate. 29 Click OK. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. name the style. and click Edit. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. and radial dimensions are modified separately. tags. such as section lines and dimension lines. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. To see the details of a particular style. angular. and specify the properties. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 32 To modify a line pattern. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 34 Click OK.

When you create a new view. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. and choose a decimal symbol. when you add a door with the tag option selected. Medium. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. 64 Review the table. 55 Click OK. click Load. 58 Click OK. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. To move the view scales. 50 To load new annotation tags. 60 Under Walls. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. click Format. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. The detail level is based on view scale. click the arrows between columns.47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 61 Under Doors and Windows. and Angle settings. Modifying Project Settings | 841 . You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. and move view scales as needed. TIP In the drawing area. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. 53 For Length. 62 Click OK. Using the arrows between the columns. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. 57 Specify the Slope option. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. and click OK. Volume. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. For example. In the Tags dialog. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. 65 Click OK. or Fine. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.

In such a case. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. create new browser organization types. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. For example. If necessary. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. and make modifications in each area as necessary. Project Phasing on page 767 If necessary. However. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. you can set up the phases. Although these settings can be saved within a template. rename. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. or edit existing organization types. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. 73 Click OK. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. 68 Delete. Each command is available on the Settings menu. or edit existing organization types. click the Views tab. furniture. In a typical project. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables.Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. This could be useful for things such as hardware. rename. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 834. Phases Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 599 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. or electrical fixtures. 71 Delete. phase filters. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 72 If necessary. You can find additional information in Help. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. 70 Click the Sheets tab. Use the table below as a checklist. Links to associated tutorials are provided. create new browser organization types. 69 If necessary. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 849.

Site Settings If necessary. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. In addition. 3 To modify. and electrical fixtures. and the poche depth. or use the Project Browser. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. you could load detail components. For example. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. Depending on the intended use of this template. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. the section cut material. you can set the default contour line interval. or modify a door. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 843 .Settings Menu Command View Templates Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. create. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 843. you do both. In the steps that follow. However. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. click Load. click Bar. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. For example. there are some important thoughts to consider. if you load every available window type. 2 In the Type Selector. or add to this selection. notice the list of doors already loaded. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. or load a new door type. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 695 Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. If this selection is satisfactory. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Although the options are endless. You can load any family or group into a template. Select it. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. Although this is possible. click Door. and click Open. do so before starting this exercise. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 845. title blocks. create. modify. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. you may want to delete. you can move onto the next component type. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template.

and click OK. Enter a name. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. 9 Expand Annotation Symbols. Make modifications. expand Families. Create new door type 4 Click OK. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. click Edit/New. Click Duplicate. and select the title block type.Goal: Modify door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Edit/New. In the Element Properties dialog. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. and click OK.) 10 Expand the title block. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. and click OK. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. Notice that each family category is listed. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Modify type properties. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library.

Detail Level. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. This title block is currently part of the template. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 845. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. (Element Properties). you will first modify view templates. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. load. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. View Range. To do so. Discipline. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. create.11 On the Options Bar. In addition. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. click 12 Click Preview. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. Modifying Views and View Templates | 845 . In this exercise. and click Delete. In this exercise. In addition. you created new projects using different templates. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. To load a title block. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. click Load. 13 Click OK. you create the views required for your template. right-click the component. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories.

In addition. Black level heads have no associated views. 4 If necessary. select Site Plan. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. 15 In the Project Browser. and apply the appropriate template. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. and then click OK. and click OK. Notice the level names. Every time a new plan view is created.Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. 18 If you modified any other view templates. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. double-click Site. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. under Elevations. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. click Apply. At any time. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. double-click South. the view is not linked to the template in any way. you can apply a view template to any view. under Floor Plans. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. Blue level heads have associated plan views. select Architectural Plan. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. double-click Level 2. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 6 Click OK. and click OK. 11 Click Apply. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. and double-click Level 1. click Apply. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. 2 Under Names. After applying the template. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 12 In the Project Browser. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. open the view from the Project Browser.

26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. right-click Level 1. 31 Rename the 3D View. and select the desired direction. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. and click Properties. enter a view name. and click Save View. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. duplicate. click Schedule/Quantities. right-click the ViewCube. 30 In the Project Browser. notice that you have the option to rename. right-click the ViewCube. expand 3D Views. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. right-click the view name. review the floor plans. Rename. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. If prompted. use the ViewCube. right-click the ViewCube. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. click Orient to View. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. right-click {3D}. select Make Plan View. To orient the 3D view to another view. You can add schedules to a template. under Floor Plans. 22 In the Project Browser. and select the desired view. a face. and. 27 Create additional levels as needed. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. in the Project Browser. If you want to modify view properties. or delete this view. under Floor Plans. on the View toolbar. 23 To add more levels to the template. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. and click Rename. Modifying Views and View Templates | 847 . By default. To orient the 3D view to a direction. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. (Default 3D View). click Orient to a Direction. click Level.20 In the Project Browser. and elevations. and modify their properties accordingly. in the shortcut menu. If it does not display. 24 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. or delete them as needed. under 3D Views. or an edge of the ViewCube. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. duplicate. click 29 In the Project Browser. review the existing floor plans. ceiling plans.

and click OK. On the Sorting/Grouping tab.txt for MicroStation). and click OK. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock.txt for AutoCAD. 848 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . or exportlayersdgn. On the Appearance tab. You can still add views to the sheet. You are prompted to select a title block. click Add View. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. Right-click the sheet name. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. modify settings as needed. expand Sheets (all). To do so. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and click Rename. To later add a title block to a sheet. select one.35 If you want to add schedules to your template. On the Filter tab. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 40 To add views to the sheet. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. TIP In the Export Layers dialog. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. in the Project Browser. After the sheet is created. assign filters. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 848. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. select the category type. click Sheet. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. Select a view. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. select the default title block. When you import a DWG or DXF file. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. modify settings as needed. On the Formatting tab. 42 Create new sheets as needed. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 37 Click OK. select and order required fields. modify settings as needed. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. select the title block and delete it. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template.

Using shared parameters. When scheduling. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. select Save As. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. name the file. and they become the set mappings for the project. and related multi-category tags and schedules. and click Save. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. for example. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. and so on.2 For each category. and click Save. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. project parameters. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 849. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. because each office has a unique set of needs. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. name the file. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. 8 In the dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. They cannot be shared with other projects. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. For example. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. click Save As. windows. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. You can save these mappings to a text file. project parameters. and click Save. name the file. When you create a multi-category schedule. When you import a DWG or DXF file. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. therefore. 9 Click Save As. and so on. 5 For each category. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 255 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 849 . doors. These settings are retained within the project template.

click New. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. you can create a list of parameters. 22 Click OK. For each parameter group. 8 Under Parameters. 5 Enter the group name. and choose a shared parameter. 850 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . add required parameters. select a group to add parameters to. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 26 Click OK. 25 Click Select. 27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. 17 Under Discipline. 9 Name the parameter. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. select a parameter value type. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. If a file already exists. 18 Under Type of Parameter. select Project parameter. and click OK. 14 Click Add. 23 Add project parameters as needed. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. 28 Click OK. 21 Under Categories. 11 For each parameter group. 3 Name and save the file. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. click Add. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. 2 Click Create. 10 Click OK. If this template will be used by multiple team members. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. and specify its discipline and type. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. you may want to save the file to a network location. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. enter a parameter name. 24 To add a shared project parameter. for Name.on page 231. click New. under Groups. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 19 Under Group parameter under. Creating Named Print Settings on page 851. select a parameter discipline type. and select Shared Parameter. 16 Under Parameter Data.

6 In the New dialog. select a different printer. 35 For Name. click OK. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. for Name. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. Creating Named Print Settings | 851 . and click Open. you can load them into the template. 9 In the Print dialog. 34 For Category. 32 Navigate to the directory. and the percent of actual size. and print. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. you can set options such as sheet sizes. select the tag. and create new settings for this printer. click Setup. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. By creating named settings within the template. save the file as a template. click Schedule/Quantities. For each printer. 2 Under Printer. modify the printer settings. enter a new name for the printer. you need only select a setting. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Setup. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. By going first to the Print command. paper placement. make minor modifications if necessary. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise.29 Add shared project parameters as needed. 3 Under Settings. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. click Save as. For information on creating multi-category tags. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. 37 When you have completed the schedule. enter a name for the schedule. or refer to the online help. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. and click OK. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. and click OK. select Multi-Category. Click OK. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. The tag is now part of the template. and make it your default template file. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. 5 Click Save As. In this exercise. Creating Named Print Settings on page 851. you create named print settings. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 4 Modify the printer settings. Create additional settings as needed.

TIP There are other ways you can create a template. you ensure that office standards are maintained. and saved them to a template. By investing the time to individualize your template. 19 Select the template. and click Save. select Template Files (*. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. and click Open.10 Repeat these steps as needed. 20 Click OK. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. 25 Click OK. If you have a project. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 11 Click Close when finished. If you need to share this file with others. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. Your template is complete. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 23 For Default template file. 852 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and navigate to the location where you saved the template. save it in a network location. 22 Click the File Locations tab. you modified settings. 24 Navigate to the template location. 15 Name the template. You can also set this template as your default template. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. loaded components.rte). In addition. and click Open. select it. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. In this lesson. This can provide a good starting point for a template. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. 14 Under Save as type. The only remaining task is to save it. In addition. click Browse. 18 Click Browse.